JP7534608B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Gaming machines that use electronic information (electronic medals) as gaming value (gaming medium) instead of physical (tangible) medals (referred to as "medalless gaming machines," "managed gaming machines," "sealed gaming machines," etc.) have been known for some time (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-062558 A

The problem that this invention aims to solve is to enable appropriate information processing in gaming machines that use electronic information as gaming value.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solving means (the configurations of the corresponding embodiments are shown in parentheses).
The present invention relates to
The memory area of the microprocessor (one-chip microprocessor 500) includes:
A main control ROM area (a storage area of the main control ROM 502);
A game media number control ROM area (a storage area of the game media number control ROM 504),
A ROM area outside the use area (a storage area of the ROM 506 outside the use area),
A first register bank (register bank 0) is used in the program in the main control ROM area,
A second register bank (register bank 1) is provided for use in a program in the game media number control ROM area;
The first register bank has a plurality of registers (e.g., an F register, an SP register, etc.),
The second register bank has a plurality of registers (e.g., an F register, an SP register, etc.),
By executing a special call command (CALLEX command) stored in the main control ROM area , it is possible to call a program in the number of game media control ROM area from a program in the main control ROM area,
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to switch from the first register bank to the second register bank by executing a special call command stored in the main control ROM area .

The present invention makes it possible to perform appropriate information processing.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, in a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a first example of a power supply path in the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a second example of a power supply path in the first embodiment. A figure showing a list of commands (main control commands) transmitted from the main control board to the dispensing control board in the first embodiment. A figure showing a list of commands (dispensing control commands) transmitted from the dispensing control board to the main control board in the first embodiment. A figure showing a list of commands (management device commands) sent from the management device to the dispensing control board in the first embodiment. A figure showing a list of commands (gaming machine commands) transmitted from the payout control board to the management device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing flow of a main routine in the dispensing control board in the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the process flow of analyzing a main control command in step S110 of FIG. 8. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control command analysis process in step S110 of FIG. 8, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 9. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lending process in step S119 of FIG. 8. 10 is a flowchart showing the process flow of counting in step S117 of FIG. 8. 5 is a flowchart showing a process flow of a main routine in a main control board in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the flow of power-on processing in the main control board and the payout control board in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing in the main control board and the payout control board in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of three-coin bet processing on the main control board and the payout control board in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of one-coin bet processing in the main control board and the payout control board in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of game start processing on the main control board and the payout control board in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of game ending processing in the main control board and the payout control board in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the flow of the payout process in the main control board and the payout control board in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the flow of return processing in the main control board and the dispensing control board in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the flow of power-on processing in the dispensing control board and management device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing the flow of the loan processing in the dispensing control board and management device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the flow of counting processing in the dispensing control board and management device in the first embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the flow of counting processing in the dispensing control board and management device in the first embodiment, and is a flowchart continuing from Figure 24. A diagram showing the waveforms of the data signal and strobe signal in serial communication between the dispensing control board and the management device in the first embodiment. 4 is a timing chart showing the on/off states of each signal when an electronic medal is lent in the first embodiment. 5 is a timing chart showing the on/off states of each signal during counting (refunding) of electronic medals in the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of the gaming machine in the second embodiment. A diagram explaining telegrams between the gaming machine and the rental unit in the second embodiment. 13 is a diagram explaining gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing a basic communication sequence in the second embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing Example 1 of a startup sequence (when the gaming machine starts up first) in the second embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing example 2 of a startup sequence (when the rental unit starts up first) in the second embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing a basic sequence of a gaming machine information notification in the second embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing a counting notification sequence in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a counting process in the second embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing a lending notification sequence in the second embodiment. A diagram showing a gaming machine information notification timer and a gaming machine information notification request flag in the second embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an update sequence of a gaming machine information notification timer in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing gaming machine information management in the second embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the internal memory of a main CPU 55 in a third embodiment, in which (A) shows an overview of the internal memory and (B) shows an internal register area. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of an F register. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a stack area in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing main instructions in the third embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing aspects of an LDF instruction and an LD instruction. FIG. 2 illustrates aspects of a CALEX instruction. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a conventional CALL instruction and a RET instruction. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start (M_PRG_SET) in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which a CALLEX instruction and a jump instruction are used. A block diagram showing an outline of the control of a gaming machine in a fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a memory map of a built-in memory in a fourth embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing division of regions in the fourth embodiment, in which FIG. 13A shows Example 1 and FIG. 13B shows Example 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating communication between areas in a fourth embodiment. A diagram showing an example program (example 1) for control areas 1 to 3. A diagram showing an example program (example 2) for control areas 1 to 3. A diagram showing an example program (example 3) for control areas 1 to 3. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the programs in control areas 1 to 3.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows:
"Game value (game medium)" refers to a medium used for games, and in this embodiment, is "electronic information (electronic medal)."
In addition, "electronic information (electronic medal)" refers to money (banknotes) that is inserted into the management device (CR unit) 200, and is converted into electronic information corresponding to the amount of the money, and some or all of that electronic information can be credited to the gaming machine as gaming value for playing on the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the "management device (CR unit) 200" is a device for managing the lending and refunding of electronic information as gaming value, and is provided for each gaming machine and placed adjacent to that gaming machine. In a gaming hall, the management device 200 is called "sand" because it is placed between the gaming machines. Moreover, a "gaming system" is composed of a gaming machine and the management device 200 corresponding to that gaming machine.
Furthermore, "renting" refers to transferring electronic information representing gaming value from the management device 200 to the gaming machine and crediting it inside the gaming machine.

Moreover, "counting" refers to returning electronic information as the game value credited inside the gaming machine to the management device 200. When the counting switch 47 is operated, electronic information as the game value credited inside the gaming machine is returned to the management device 200. At this time, the number of credits becomes "0", and the electronic information managed by the management device 200 is increased accordingly.
Furthermore, "credit" refers to the storage of electronic information as gaming value inside a gaming machine.
Furthermore, the term "bet" refers to placing a bet of electronic information as a gaming value in order to play a game. When the bet switch 40 is operated, electronic information as a credited gaming value is bet.

The "prescribed number" refers to the number of bets that can be made to start (execute) a game in question.
Further, "payout" refers to adding electronic information representing a gaming value in an amount corresponding to the payout of a winning combination to the credit amount based on the winning combination.
Furthermore, the term "bet medal" refers to electronic information representing the gaming value bet for playing a game.
Furthermore, "stored medals" refers to electronic information representing credited (stored) gaming value.

In addition, a "reserved bet" refers to betting a part or all of the electronic information representing the game value credited inside the gaming machine, within the range that can be bet for that game, by operating the bet switch 40, in order to play the game.
Furthermore, "automatic bet" refers to the automatic betting of electronic information representing the game value of the amount bet in the previous game by the control processing of the slot machine 10 as a gaming machine when a replay is won.

Furthermore, "cancel" refers to returning the electronic information (bet medals) representing the betted game value to credits by operating the cancel switch 46. When the cancel switch 46 is operated, the electronic information representing the betted game value is returned to credits. At this time, the number of bet medals becomes "0" and is added to the number of credits.
Moreover, "return" refers to storing electronic information as a game value stored inside the management device 200 onto a card (such as a magnetic card or an IC card) and ejecting the card from the card reader/writer 205. When the return switch 203 is operated, the electronic information is stored onto the card and the card is ejected from the card reader/writer 205.

In addition, when a game progresses from the "N-1" game, to the "N" game, to the "N+1" game, ... (where "N" is an integer of 2 or more), and the current game is the "N" game, the "N" game is referred to as the "current game." The "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, a number with "(B)" added to the end (especially 8-bit) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with "(H)" added to the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a number showing "16" in decimal is written as "00010000(B)" in binary and "10(H)" in hexadecimal. Furthermore, a number showing a decimal number is written as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether the number is binary, decimal, or hexadecimal, the final symbols "(B)", "(D)", and "(H)" may be omitted.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First Embodiment
The slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment, does not use physical (tangible) medals as gaming value (gaming medium) but uses electronic information (electronic medals). Therefore, the slot machine 10 of this embodiment does not include a medal insertion slot, a medal selector, a medal payout device, etc.

In the first embodiment, a management device (CR unit) 200 is placed adjacent to the slot machine 10, and the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 are connected to enable two-way communication. Electronic medals can be transferred between the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 through communication, and the slot machine 10 can play games using the electronic medals transferred from the management device 200.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment. In FIG. 1, the slot machine 10, a management device (CR unit) 200, and a hall computer 300 are shown.
As shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, the slot machine 10 includes, as representative control boards, a main control board 50, a sub-control board 80, and a payout control board 100 (a credit number management board).

In Fig. 1, the solid lines indicate communication lines for data exchange, and the direction of the arrows indicates the direction of data flow. For example, the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 are configured to be able to communicate in both directions. In contrast, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 communicate in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (this does not mean that it is equipped with only those shown in FIG. 1).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for progressing through the game, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52.
The input port 51 is a connection portion to which signals from an operation switch or the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection portion to transmit signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32 .
In FIG. 1, input peripheral devices are indicated by arrows pointing from the signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 50, and output peripheral devices are indicated by arrows pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

In addition, the RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game, etc.
Furthermore, the ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.
Furthermore, the main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC with calculation functions) provided on the main control board 50, which executes programs and performs calculations necessary for the progress of the game, and specifically performs the drawing of winning roles, drive control of the reels 31, and payouts when a prize is won.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. The RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be mounted inside the MPU or may be provided externally.
Incidentally, an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85 is also mounted on a sub-control board 80, which will be described later. Incidentally, the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided externally instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is provided with a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, (left, center, right) stop switches 42, a cancel switch 46, and a counting switch 47 as operation switches operated by the player.
The bet switches 40, start switches 41, (left, center, right) stop switches 42, and cancel switches 46 are electrically connected to a main control board 50, and the counting switch 47 is electrically connected not to the main control board 50 but to a payout control board 100 (credit number management board) described later.

Here, an "operation switch (or simply, "switch")" refers to a device (including an electrical circuit and/or electrical components) that switches an electrical signal on/off based on (receives external force) the operation of an operating object by a player (operator), and does not limit the shape of the operating object operated by the player.
When the operation switch is in the OFF state, for example, light from the light-emitting element continues to be incident on the light-receiving element (when the light-receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the OFF state). Then, when the operation switch (the operating object) is operated by a player or the like, the light from the light-emitting element is not incident on the light-receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned on is sent to the main control board 50. Note that, conversely to the above, the operation switch may be configured so that when the operation switch is in the OFF state, light from the light-emitting element does not enter the light-receiving element, and the ON state is reached when light from the light-emitting element enters the light-receiving element.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is in the shape of a lever (rod) (hence, it is also referred to as the "start lever (switch) 41"), and the operating bodies of the bet switch 40, the stop switch 42, the cancel switch 46, and the counting switch 47 are in the shape of push buttons (hence, they are also referred to as the "bet button (switch) 40", the "stop button (switch) 42", the "cancel button (switch) 46", and the "counting button (switch) 47").

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, for example, and when the operation of the operation switch is not permitted, the LED of the operation switch emits red light, for example, to indicate to the player the permitted/not permitted state of the operation switch.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when betting the electronic medals credited inside the slot machine 10 for the current game.
In this embodiment, the bet switches 40 include a 1 bet switch 40a for betting one electronic medal with one operation, and a 3 bet switch 40b for betting three (the maximum number, the specified number) electronic medals with one operation.
Alternatively, a single bet switch 40 may be provided, and three (the maximum number, a prescribed number) of the credited electronic medals may be bet by operating the bet switch 40 once.

The start switch 41 is an operating switch that is operated by the player when starting up the reels 31 (left, center, and right reels 31) (to start the rotation of the reels 31).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three reels 31 (left, center, and right), and are operation switches that are operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reel 31.

Furthermore, the cancel switch 46 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when returning the bet electronic medals (bet medals) to credits.
When the cancel switch 46 is operated, the bet electronic medals are returned to credits. At this time, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits is increased by that amount. For example, when three electronic medals have been bet, when the cancel switch 46 is operated, the number of bets becomes "0" from "3" and "3" is added to the number of credits.

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated to turn the power of the slot machine 10 on/off.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is operated when changing or checking settings.
When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees, the setting key switch 12 is turned on.
Furthermore, when the power switch 11 is turned off (power off state) and the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and then the power switch 11 is turned on in this state, the setting is being changed, that is, the setting change mode is entered.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on while the power switch 11 is on, the setting confirmation mode is entered.

The setting switch 13 is a switch that is operated when changing a setting value.
Each time the setting switch 13 is operated during a setting change, the setting value is incremented by "1."
In this embodiment, the setting values range from setting 1 to setting 6, and when changing the setting, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the setting value changes as follows: "1" → "2" → ... → "6" → "1" → ...
During the setting change, one of the setting values is displayed on a predetermined display device, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed setting value is confirmed.

The reset switch 14 is a switch that is operated when initializing the RWM 53 or when canceling an error.
When the power switch 11 is turned on with the reset switch 14 being turned on, an initialization process is performed and the predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
Furthermore, when the cause of the error is removed and the reset switch 14 is operated (turned on), the error is cleared.

In addition, the main control board 50 outputs an external signal (outer end signal) from a part of the output port 52 to the external centralized terminal board 190 .
Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be outputted to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as the hall computer 300 or a data counter installed in the hall) via the external centralized terminal board 190.
1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the hall computer 300 via the external centralized terminal board 190. Then, signals are transmitted unidirectionally from the main control board 50 to the external centralized terminal board 190, and signals are transmitted unidirectionally from the external centralized terminal board 190 to the hall computer 300.

As shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is provided with an acquired number display LED 78 and a credit number display LED 76 as number display devices.
The acquired number display LED 78 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, while the credit number display LED 76 is electrically connected not to the main control board 50 but to a payout control board 100 (credit number management board) described later.
The winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of electronic medals paid out (the number of medals won by the player) when a winning combination is achieved, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled so as to be turned off when there are no electronic medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may display "0".

The acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the number of paid out electronic medals (acquired number), but when an error occurs, it also functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, in a game in which the order in which buttons are pressed is notified during the AT, the winning number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays button press instruction information (notifies an advantageous button press order).
Therefore, the winning number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the payout number (winning number), error content, and push order instruction information. However, it is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED for displaying push order instruction information.
During the AT, notification of advantageous button pressing sequences is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor 32 (a stepping motor in this embodiment) of the symbol display device.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, motors 32 that drive each of the reels 31 , and a reel sensor 33 that detects the position of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31 , is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31 , and is controlled by the reel control means 65 .
Here, the reels 31 consist of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, the stop switch 42 operated to stop the middle reel 31 is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and has a reel tape attached to its outer periphery on which a number of types of symbols (symbols constituting symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed.
Each reel 31 is provided with one index (it may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, etc. Each index is detected by a reel sensor 33.

The reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the reel sensor 33 detects an index, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.
Also, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in advance in the ROM 54. This makes it possible to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected. Furthermore, it becomes possible to identify how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 should be driven from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in order to stop the symbol on the pay line, counting from the symbol on the reference position.

When a player starts a game, he bets the credited electronic medals by operating the bet switch 40. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated with the specified number of electronic medals for that game bet, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 receives this signal, it performs a lottery using the role selection means 61 (internal selection means), and controls the drive of all motors 32 to rotate all reels 31. In this way, the reels 31 are rotated by the motors 32, and the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, the player operates a stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42).
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to that stop switch 42, and controls the stop of the reel 31 related to that motor 32 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the role lottery means 61 (the result determined by the internal lottery means). Then, the game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 stop. Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to any role stops on an active line (when that role wins), the electronic medal corresponding to the winning role is paid out, etc.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role selection means 61, etc. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.
The role selection means 61 selects (determines, selects) the winning number. Here, the "selection of the winning number by the role selection means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the Entertainment and Amusement Act Regulations (regulations on the certification of gaming machines and the inspection of models, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as the "Regulations"). The result of the selection by the role selection means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the Regulations. Therefore, the role selection means 61 is also referred to as the "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the Regulations.

When the winning number is determined by the role selection means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the role condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition devices and the role condition devices that are operable in the game are determined. For this reason, the role selection means 61 is also called a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning role determination (lottery or selection) means, etc.
The role selection means 61 includes, for example, a random number generation means for the lottery (such as a hardware random number), a random number extraction means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and a winning number determination means for determining the winning number based on the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random numbers are generated by a counter that performs one count every 200 n (nano) sec and continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle, and continues to count random numbers while the slot machine 10 is powered on.
The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player.
The winning number determination means collates the random number extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table to determine the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number belongs.

The winning flag control means 62 controls the on/off state of a winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination selection means 61 .
In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When any role is selected by the role selection means 61, the winning flag for that role is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that winning roles include a case where there is one winning role (single winning) and a case where there are multiple winning roles (multiple winning).

When the reel control means 65 receives a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly in this embodiment when it detects that the start switch 41 has been operated (on), it controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating.
In addition, after the winning number is determined by the role selection means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off state of the winning flag for the current game and selects a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off state of the winning flag, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, determines the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 based on the timing when the operation (on) of the stop switch 42 is detected, and drives and controls the motor 32 to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 controls the reel 31 to stop so that, within the range of the stopping control of the reel 31, a pattern combination corresponding to a winning role (a role for which the winning flag is on) can be stopped on an active line, and also controls the reel 31 to stop so that a pattern combination corresponding to a role other than the winning role (a role for which the winning flag is off) is not stopped on an active line.
Here, "within the range of the stopping control of the reel 31" means within the range of the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)).

In this embodiment, the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed of approximately 80 rotations per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 are stopped is set to within 190 ms, except for a specific reel 31 (for example, the center reel 31) during MB operation. As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to four symbols, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation.
On the other hand, for a specific reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 is stopped is set to within 75 ms. As a result, for a specific reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

Then, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the symbol is controlled to stop on the predetermined effective line when the stop switch 42 is operated.
In other words, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the specified pay line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the range of the reel 31's stop control until the reel 31 is stopped, so that the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is stopped on the specified pay line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and a symbol combination of a winning combination not corresponding to the winning number stops on an active line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the range of the reel 31 stop control when the reel 31 stops, so that the symbol combination of a winning combination not corresponding to the winning number does not stop on an active line (kick-off stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which multiple winning combinations are achieved (for example, when the push order bell is achieved), the priority of the winning combinations is predetermined according to the order of pushing the stop switch 42 and the timing of operating the stop switch 42, and the pulling-in stop control of the symbol associated with the most prioritized combination is performed according to the predetermined priority order.

The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination on the reel 31 that has stopped on the pay line corresponds to any winning combination when the reel 31 stops.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on an active line. Specifically, based on the condition device operated in the game and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the winning determination means 66 determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line before the reel 31 actually stops, or determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line after the reel 31 stops.

When the winning determination means 66 determines that the symbol combination stopped on the winning line when the reels 31 stop matches a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination and that winning combination results in a winning combination, the payout means 67 performs a process of adding the number of electronic medals corresponding to the winning combination to the credit amount.
Furthermore, when a replay wins, the payout means 67 performs control so as to automatically insert (automatically bet) the number of electronic medals inserted in the current game without adding the electronic medals to the credit amount.

The main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information (control commands) necessary for the performance to be output by the sub-control board 80 .
Control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, information regarding the results of the role selection (results determined by internal lottery), information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information regarding the winning role, etc.

The sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during play and when the game is on standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 transmits information (control commands) necessary for outputting the performance unidirectionally to the sub-control board 80 via serial communication.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, in both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection, the communication is not limited to serial communication, but may be parallel communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the following performance peripheral devices such as the performance lamps 21 as shown in Fig. 1 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the performance peripheral devices are not limited to these.

The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data etc. acquired when the sub-CPU 85 controls the performance.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data, such as those used when conducting lotteries related to performance, as performance data.
Furthermore, the sub-CPU 85 refers to a CPU (an IC with a calculation function) provided on the sub-control board 80, and executes programs and performs calculations necessary for outputting effects during gameplay and when waiting to play.

The performance lamps 21 are, for example, LEDs, and light up or flash in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met.
The performance lamps 21 include back lamps that are arranged on the inner circumference of each reel 31 and illuminate the patterns displayed on the reels 31 (three consecutive patterns visible from above and below through the display window) from behind, fluorescent lamps that illuminate the patterns on the reels 31 from above the reels 31, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and flash when a winning combination is achieved, etc.
Furthermore, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to provide various effects during a game.

Furthermore, the image display device 23 consists of an LCD display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various presentation images during play (such as correct button presses, presentations corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game), game information (such as the number of plays and number of coins won when the reels are activated or during the advantageous zone (AT)), etc.
The sub-CPU 85 of the sub-control board 80 also includes a performance output control means 91. The performance output control means 91 determines what kind of performance is to be output and at what timing based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, and controls the output of various performances from the peripheral devices for performance based on this determination.

As shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, a slot machine 10 includes a payout control board 100 (a credit number management board).
The payout control board 100 also manages the number of credits of electronic medals.
Here, the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 are electrically connected and configured to enable two-way communication.
In addition, the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 do not necessarily have to be electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means.
In addition, in both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection, serial communication may be used, parallel communication may be used, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

The payout control board 100, like the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, comprises an input port 101, an output port 102, an RWM 103, a ROM 104, and a credit number management CPU 105, etc.
In addition, the payout control board 100 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, a counting switch 47 as an operation switch, a credit number display LED 76 as a number display device, and an external management device (CR unit) 200 of the slot machine 10 via an input port 101 or an output port 102.

The RWM 103 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data etc. that is captured when the credit number management CPU 105 manages the credit number.
The ROM 104 is a storage medium for storing programs for managing the number of credits, various data, and the like.
Furthermore, the credit number management CPU 105 refers to a CPU (an IC having a calculation function) provided on the payout control board 100, and executes programs and performs calculations required for managing the credit number.

The counting switch 47 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when returning the electronic medals credited inside the slot machine 10 to the management device 200 .
When the counting switch 47 is operated, the electronic medals credited inside the slot machine 10 are returned to the management device 200. At this time, the number of credits becomes "0", and the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200 is increased accordingly.
For example, when 100 electronic medals are credited inside the slot machine 10, operating the counting switch 47 changes the credit number from "100" to "0," and "100" is added to the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200.

Also, for example, when three electronic medals have been bet and 100 electronic medals have been credited, operating the cancel switch 46 returns the bet electronic medals to credits. At this time, the number of bets becomes "0" from "3", and the number of credits becomes "100" from "103". After that, when the counting switch 47 is operated, the number of credits becomes "0" from "103", and "103" is added to the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200.
In this manner, in this embodiment, if there are electronic medals bet on the player when the player stops playing, the player first operates the cancel switch 46 to return the bet electronic medals to credits, and then operates the counting switch 47 to return the credited electronic medals to the management device 200.

However, when a replay is won in the previous game and the number of electronic medals bet in the previous game is automatically bet, the setting is such that the automatically bet electronic medals cannot be returned to credits even if the cancel switch 46 is operated. In other words, the setting is such that the automatically bet electronic medals cannot be returned to credits even if the cancel switch 46 is operated.
Incidentally, both the electronic medals bet based on the operation of the bet switch 40 and the electronic medals automatically bet based on a replay win may be returned to credits by operating the cancel switch 46.

Moreover, the electronic medals that have been bet and the electronic medals that have been credited may be returned to the management device 200 by operating the counting switch 47 .
For example, when three electronic medals have been bet and 100 electronic medals have been credited, operating the counting switch 47 may cause the betted and credited electronic medals to be returned to the management device 200, the number of bets and the number of credits to become "0", and "103" to be added to the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200.
In this case, the cancel switch 46 may or may not be provided.

The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of electronic medals credited inside the slot machine 10 .
In this embodiment, a maximum of 10,000 electronic medals can be credited. That is, the upper limit of the number of credits is set to "10,000." Therefore, the credit number display LED 76 is configured with five digits.
The upper limit of the number of credits is not limited to "10,000", but may be, for example, "15,000", "30,000", or "50,000".
Further, the number of digits of the credit number display LED 76 is not limited to five digits, but can be appropriately set according to the upper limit of the credit number.

Also, an enable signal can be sent from the dispensing control board 100 to the main control board 50. The main control board 50 is set so that when the enable signal is on, various processes can be executed, and when the enable signal is off, predetermined processes cannot be executed.
In this embodiment, when the number of credits reaches the upper limit, that is, when the display of the credit number display LED 76 reaches "10000", the enable signal is turned off. Then, when the enable signal is turned off, the main control board 50 controls so that the operation of the bet switch 40 and the start switch 41 cannot be accepted.
The enable signal may be turned off when the number of credits reaches "15,000,""30,000," or "50,000."

For example, it may be possible to execute a normal game and a special game (1BB game; first type big bonus game; operation of a first type continuous role operation device) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and when a transition is made from the normal game to the special game, the game may come to a halt at the end of the special game, and the game may no longer progress. In other words, a halting function may be provided. The conditions for halting the game are not limited to the end of the special game, and can be set as appropriate. And when the conditions for halting the game are met, the enable signal may be turned off.

In this case, a stoppage setting switch can be provided to set (switch) whether the stoppage function is enabled (with stoppage) or disabled (without stoppage). A stoppage release switch can also be provided to release the stoppage. When the conditions for a stoppage are met, the stoppage can be released by operating the stoppage release switch, allowing the game to proceed and turning on the enable signal. The stoppage release switch can also be used in combination with other switches, such as the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14.

The credit number management CPU 105 of the payout control board 100 also includes a credit number management means 111. The credit number management means 111 manages (adds or subtracts) the number of credits based on control commands sent from the main control board 50, control commands sent from the management device 200, and the operation of the counting switch 47, and controls the display of the number of credits on the credit number display LED 76.

The management device (CR unit) 200 is a device for managing the lending and paying back of electronic medals. One management device 200 is installed for each slot machine 10. In a hall, the management devices 200 are called "sand" because they are placed between the slot machines 10. A slot machine 10 and the management device 200 corresponding to that slot machine 10 make up one gaming system.

As shown in FIG. 1, a payout control board 100 of a slot machine 10 and a management device 200 are electrically connected to each other and configured to enable two-way communication.
The payout control board 100 and the management device 200 are connected via a game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board.
In addition, the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200 do not necessarily have to be electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means.
Furthermore, in both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection, serial communication may be used, parallel communication may be used, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1 , the dispensing control board 100 is capable of two-way communication with the main control board 50 , and is also capable of two-way communication with the management device 200 .
Furthermore, through communication between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100, electronic medals can be transferred (loaned) from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100, and the loaned electronic medals can be credited to the payout control board 100.

In addition, by communication between the payout control board 100 and the main control board 50, it is possible to play the game by betting the electronic medals credited to the payout control board 100, and when a winning combination is achieved, the paid-out electronic medals can be credited to the payout control board 100.
Furthermore, when a player stops playing, the electronic medals credited to the payout control board 100 can be transferred (refunded) to the management device 200 through communication between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100.

As shown in FIG. 1, the management device 200 includes a bill insertion slot 201, a loan switch 202, a return switch 203, a credit display unit 204, a card reader/writer 205, and the like.
The bill insertion slot 201 is an insertion slot for inserting bills (for example, 1,000 yen bills) required for lending electronic medals.
When a bill inserted into the management device 200 through the bill insertion slot 201 is correctly recognized, the point value corresponding to the inserted bill is displayed on the point value display unit 204. The point value display unit 204 is, for example, configured with a three-digit seven-segment display. For example, when a 1,000 yen bill is inserted, the point value is displayed as "10," and when a 10,000 yen bill is inserted, the point value is displayed as "100."

The lending switch 202 is a switch that is operated by the player when lending out an electronic medal, on condition that the remaining number of times is displayed on the number of times display section 204 .
For example, it is possible to set it so that every time the lending switch 202 is pressed once, electronic medals equivalent to a number "10" are lent out.
For example, when a 1,000-yen bill is inserted into management device 200 through bill insertion slot 201, the number of points displayed on point display unit 204 is "10", and the number of electronic medals loaned out per point "1" is 5. In this case, if loan switch 202 is operated when point display unit 204 displays "10", 50 electronic medals are loaned out. Then, through communication between management device 200 and payout control board 100, the 50 loaned electronic medals are credited to payout control board 100.

The number of electronic medals credited to the payout control board 100 is displayed on the credit number display LED 76. For example, when the credit number is "0", if 50 electronic medals are lent out, the display on the credit number display LED 76 changes from "0" to "50".
In this way, in this embodiment, no physical (tangible) medals are loaned to the player, but rather, through communication between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100, the loaned electronic medals are transferred from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 and credited.

The return switch 203 is a switch that is operated by the player when he or she wishes to stop playing.
When the counting switch 47 of the slot machine 10 is operated, electronic medals are returned from the slot machine 10 to the management device. Then, when the return switch 203 of the management device 200 is operated, the number of electronic medals returned from the slot machine 10 to the management device 200 and the number of electronic medals corresponding to the degree displayed on the degree display unit 204 are stored as electronic data on a card (magnetic card, IC card, etc.), and the card is discharged from the discharge port of the card reader/writer 205.

For example, suppose that the number "10" (equivalent to 50 electronic medals) is displayed on the number display unit 204 of the management device 200. Furthermore, suppose that 150 electronic medals are returned from the slot machine 10 to the management device 200 by operating the counting switch 47 of the slot machine 10. At this time, if the return switch 203 of the management device 200 is operated, electronic data equivalent to 200 electronic medals is stored in a card and is discharged from the discharge port of the card reader/writer 205.
1, the management device 200 is electrically connected to the hall computer 300. Information relating to the lending and refunding of electronic medals is transmitted unidirectionally from the management device 200 to the hall computer 300.

FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a first example of a power supply path.
Although not shown in Fig. 1, as shown in Fig. 2, the slot machine 10 is equipped with a power supply board 150. In addition, the power supply board 150 is equipped with a capacitor 151 for storing electricity, and the payout control board 100 is also equipped with a capacitor 106 for storing electricity.
Furthermore, the power supply board 150 and the main control board 50 are connected by a harness A161, and power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 50 through this harness A161.

Furthermore, the power supply board 150 and the dispensing control board 100 are connected by a harness C163, and power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the dispensing control board 100 through this harness C163.
An AC power is supplied from the outside to the power supply board 150. The AC power is converted to DC by the power supply board 150, and the power is supplied to the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100.
In addition, the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 are connected by a harness B162, and power can be supplied from the main control board 50 to the dispensing control board 100, or from the dispensing control board 100 to the main control board 50, through this harness B162.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 are connected by a harness D164, and through this harness D164, command communication is possible in both directions between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100.
The payout control board 100 is a control board that manages the number of credits of electronic medals, and since its stability has a significant impact on the player's profits, power is supplied directly to the payout control board 100 from the power supply board 150 through harness C163.

In addition, when harness C163 is broken, power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the dispensing control board 100 via harness A161, the main control board 50, and harness B162.
Furthermore, the dispensing control board 100 is equipped with a capacitor 106 for storing electricity, so that when the power supply from the power supply board 150 is cut off, power can be supplied to the dispensing control board 100 from the capacitor 106.

Furthermore, when harness A161 and harness C163 are broken, power can be supplied from capacitor 106 to dispensing control board 100, and power can be supplied from dispensing control board 100 to main control board 50 through harness B162.
In this way, in example 1, the payout control board 100 is equipped with a capacitor 106 for a backup power supply, so that even if the power supply from the power supply board 150 is cut off due to, for example, the disconnection of harness A161 or harness C163, the payout control board 100 and the main control board 50 will be driven, and processing can be reliably executed in the event of a power outage, so that no disadvantage is caused to the player.

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a second example of a power supply path.
As shown in FIG. 3, in Example 2, the power supply board 150 is not equipped with a capacitor, and the dispensing control board 100 is equipped with a capacitor A 107 and a capacitor B 108 for storing electricity.
Furthermore, the power supply board 150 and the main control board 50 are connected by a harness E165, and power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 50 through this harness E165.

Furthermore, the power supply board 150 and the dispensing control board 100 are connected by a harness G167, and power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the dispensing control board 100 through this harness G167.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 are connected by a harness F166, and power can be supplied from the main control board 50 to the dispensing control board 100, or from the dispensing control board 100 to the main control board 50, through this harness F166.

In addition, the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 are connected by a harness H168, and through this harness H168, command communication is possible in both directions between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100.
In the event that harness G167 is broken, power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the dispensing control board 100 via harness E165, the main control board 50, and harness F166.

In addition, the dispensing control board 100 is equipped with capacitors A107 and B108 for storing electricity, and when the power supply from the power supply board 150 is cut off, power can be supplied to the dispensing control board 100 from capacitors A107 and B108.
Furthermore, when harness E165 and harness G167 are broken, power can be supplied from capacitor A107 and capacitor B108 to the dispensing control board 100, and power can be supplied from capacitor A107 to the main control board 50 through harness F166.

In example 2, as in example 1, when the power supply from the power supply board 150 is interrupted, power is supplied to the dispensing control board 100 and the main control board 50 from a backup power capacitor mounted on the dispensing control board 100.
However, in Example 2, the capacitor B108 is used as a backup power source exclusively for the payout control board 100. As a result, even if the power supply from the power supply board 150 is cut off due to, for example, the disconnection of the harness E165 or the harness G167, the payout control board 100 that manages the number of credits of the electronic medals can be reliably driven, and the process at the time of the power interruption can be reliably executed, so that no disadvantage is caused to the player.

In Example 2, it is preferable to set the capacitance of the capacitor B 108 to be larger than the capacitance of the capacitor A 107. This ensures that backup power is supplied to the payout control board 100, which is closely related to the player's profit, and that processing can be performed reliably in the event of a power outage.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned off, the program on the dispensing control board 100 is set to stop before the program on the main control board 50.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the power is restored after a power outage, the program on the dispensing control board 100 is set to start before the program on the main control board 50.

4 to 7 are diagrams showing command lists.
Figure 4 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the main control board 50 to the dispensing control board 100, and Figure 5 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the dispensing control board 100 to the main control board 50.
In addition, Figure 6 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the management device 200 to the dispensing control board 100, and Figure 7 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the dispensing control board 100 to the management device 200.

Here, the commands transmitted from the main control board 50 to the dispensing control board 100 are collectively referred to as "main control commands."
In addition, the commands transmitted from the dispensing control board 100 to the main control board 50 are collectively referred to as "dispensing control commands."
Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the payout control board 100 to the management device 200 are collectively referred to as "gaming machine commands."
Furthermore, the commands sent from the management device 200 to the dispensing control board 100 are collectively referred to as "management device commands."

In this embodiment, the main control command, payout control command, gaming machine command, and management device command are all composed of 16-bit (2-byte) data.
Further, each of the main control command, payout control command, gaming machine command, and management device command is composed of a preceding command (upper 8 bits) and a subsequent command (lower 8 bits).
In other words, one main control command, payout control command, gaming machine command, or management device command is made up of 16 bits (2 bytes) of data consisting of a preceding command and a following command.
Furthermore, the preceding command is data indicating the type of command, and the succeeding command is data indicating parameters (variables).
In this embodiment, commands are sent and received via serial communication between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100, and between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200.

4 to 7, the data in the "PREVISION" column indicates the preceding command (upper 8 bits), and the data in the "SUBSEQUENT" column indicates the subsequent command (lower 8 bits). Both the preceding command and the subsequent command are expressed in hexadecimal.
The main control commands include eight types of commands listed in the "Contents" column in Fig. 4. Among these eight types of commands, the setting change start command, setting change end command, game start + RT state command, and game end + game state command are collectively referred to as "game information commands." Furthermore, the input request command, payout request command, and return request command are collectively referred to as "calculation request commands."

Examples of payout control commands include the 12 types of commands listed in the "Contents" column in Figure 5. An ACK response to an input request command is also referred to as an "input repeat command," and a NAK response to an input request command is also referred to as an "input not allowed command." Similarly, an ACK response to a payout request command, a NAK response to the same, and an ACK response to a return request command, a NAK response to the same are also referred to as a "payout repeat command," a "payout not allowed command," a "return repeat command," and a "return not allowed command," respectively. Furthermore, a NAK response in the event of an abnormality is also referred to as an "error command."

The management device commands include five types of commands listed in the "Contents" column in Fig. 6. In addition, an ACK response to a lower-order count request command is also called a "lower-order count repeat command," and an ACK response to a higher-order count request command is also called a "higher-order count repeat command."
The gaming machine commands include 13 types of commands described in the "Contents" column in Fig. 7. The ACK response to the lending request command is also called a "lending repeat command".

In Figure 4, the startup confirmation command is a command for the main control board 50 to confirm whether communication between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 is normal, and is a command sent from the main control board 50 to the dispensing control board 100 when the power is turned on.
When the power is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a start-up confirmation command to the dispensing control board 100. When the dispensing control board 100 receives the start-up confirmation command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response to the start-up confirmation command shown in FIG. 5).
Then, on the main control board 50 side, the startup confirmation command that was sent is sent back from the dispensing control board 100 as is, so that it can be determined that communication between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 is normal.

Also, as described above, when the power is cut off, the program on the dispensing control board 100 stops before the program on the main control board 50, and when the power is restored from the power cut, the program on the dispensing control board 100 starts before the program on the main control board 50.
When the power is turned on, i.e., when the power is restored after being turned off, the main control board 50 sends a start-up confirmation command to the dispensing control board 100, but since the program on the dispensing control board 100 starts first, the start-up confirmation command can be received reliably. Then, when the main control board 50 determines that the communication between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 is normal by receiving the start-up confirmation command sent back from the dispensing control board 100 as is, it is set to proceed with the subsequent processing.

In Fig. 4, the setting change start command is a command for notifying the dispensing control board 100 that the setting change mode has been entered, and is a command sent from the main control board 50 to the dispensing control board 100 when the setting change mode is entered. The following "01H" indicates that the setting key switch 12 is in the on state.
When the main control board 50 transitions to the setting change mode, it transmits a setting change start command to the dispensing control board 100. When the dispensing control board 100 receives the setting change start command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response to the setting change start command shown in FIG. 5), and also transmits a setting change start command to the management device 200 (FIG. 7). That is, the dispensing control board 100 transmits the setting change start command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

As a result, the dispensing control board 100 can determine that a transition to setting change mode has occurred. Also, the main control board 50 can determine that a transition to setting change mode has been communicated to the dispensing control board 100, as the sent setting change start command is returned unchanged from the dispensing control board 100. Furthermore, the management device 200 can also determine that a transition to setting change mode has occurred.

In Fig. 4, the setting change end command is a command for notifying the dispensing control board 100 that the setting change mode has ended, and is a command sent from the main control board 50 to the dispensing control board 100 when the setting change mode ends. The following "00H" indicates that the setting key switch 12 is in the OFF state.
When the setting change mode ends, the main control board 50 transmits a setting change end command to the dispensing control board 100. When the dispensing control board 100 receives the setting change end command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response to the setting change end command shown in FIG. 5), and also transmits a setting change end command to the management device 200 (FIG. 7). That is, the dispensing control board 100 transmits the setting change end command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

As a result, the dispensing control board 100 can determine that the setting change mode has ended. Also, the main control board 50 can determine that the end of the setting change mode has been communicated to the dispensing control board 100, as the sent setting change end command is returned unchanged from the dispensing control board 100. Furthermore, the management device 200 can also determine that the setting change mode has ended.

In Figure 4, the game start + RT status command is a command for transmitting the fact that the game has started and the RT status to the payout control board 100, and is a command sent from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 when the start switch 41 is turned on.
When the start switch 41 is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a game start + RT state command to the payout control board 100. When the payout control board 100 receives the game start + RT state command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response of the game start + RT state command shown in FIG. 5), and further transmits the game start + RT state command to the management device 200 (FIG. 7). That is, the payout control board 100 transmits the game start + RT state command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

This allows the payout control board 100 to determine that play has started and that the RT state is in effect. Also, the main control board 50 can determine that play has started and that the RT state has been transmitted to the payout control board 100, as the sent play start + RT state command is returned as is from the payout control board 100. Furthermore, the management device 200 can also determine that play has started and that the RT state is in effect.

In Figure 4, the game end + game status command is a command for transmitting the fact that the game has ended and the game status to the payout control board 100, and is a command sent from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last reel 31 to stop) changes from on to off.
When the third stop switch 42 goes from on to off (the player releases his/her hand from the third stop switch 42), the main control board 50 transmits a game end + game status command to the payout control board 100. Also, when the payout control board 100 receives the game end + game status command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response of the game end + game status command shown in FIG. 5), and further transmits the game end + game status command to the management device 200 (FIG. 7). That is, the payout control board 100 transmits the game end + game status command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

This allows the payout control board 100 to determine that the game has ended and the game status. Also, the main control board 50 can determine that the game has ended and the game status has been transmitted to the payout control board 100, as the sent game end + game status command is returned as is from the payout control board 100. Furthermore, the management device 200 can also determine that the game has ended and the game status.

In Figure 4, the deposit request command is a command requesting the payout control board 100 to subtract the bet number from the credit number, and is a command sent from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 when the bet switch 40 is turned on.
The command following the input request command indicates the bet amount (the amount to be subtracted from the credit amount based on the operation of the bet switch 40).

In this embodiment, when the 1 bet switch 40a is turned on, the main control board 50 sends an input request command "2001H" (1 coin input request command) to the payout control board 100, requesting that the bet number "1" be subtracted from the number of credits.
In addition, when the 3 bet switch 40b is turned on, the main control board 50 sends an input request command "2003H" (3-coin input request command) to the payout control board 100, requesting that the bet number "3" be subtracted from the number of credits.
In addition, when the 3 bet switch 40b is on, a 1-coin insertion request command may be sent three times to the payout control board 100 as an insertion request command.

In addition, when the payout control board 100 receives an input request command, it determines whether or not it is possible to accept the input request, specifically, whether or not the number of credits is greater than or equal to the number of bets (the number indicated by the command following the input request command).
Then, when it is determined that the input request can be accepted, i.e., when it is determined that the number of credits is equal to or greater than the number of bets, the payout control board 100 executes a process to subtract the number of bets from the number of credits, executes a process to update the display of the credit number display LED 76, and sends an input repeat command to the main control board 50 (it sends the received input request command back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response to the input request command shown in Figure 5)).

For example, when the number of credits is "50", if a command requesting the insertion of three coins "2003H" is received, the payout control board 100 executes a process of subtracting the number of bets "3" indicated by the command subsequent to the command requesting the insertion of three coins "2003H" from the number of credits "50", changes the display on the credit number display LED 76 from "50" to "47", and transmits a command to repeat the insertion to the main control board 50.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the input request cannot be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of credits is less than the number of bets (for example, when the number of credits is "2" and a command requesting the input of 3 coins "2003H" is received), the payout control board 100 does not perform the process of subtracting the number of bets from the number of credits, but sends an input not possible command to the main control board 50 (a NAK response to the input request command shown in FIG. 5).

Furthermore, when a deposit repeat command is received (the sent deposit request command is sent back as is from the payout control board 100), the main control board 50 determines that the request to subtract the bet number from the credit number has been permitted, and executes processing according to the electronic medal bet (for example, processing to light up the 1 bet display LED to 3 bet display LED, and processing to allow operation of the start switch 41 to be accepted).
On the other hand, when an insertion prohibition command is received, the main control board 50 determines that the request to subtract the bet number from the credit number is not permitted, and does not execute the process according to the electronic medal bet.
In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed after sending the deposit request command and neither the deposit repeat command nor the deposit disallowed command is received, a timeout occurs and the main control board 50 sends the deposit request command again to the dispensing control board 100.

In this way, when the payout control board 100 is requested to subtract the number of bets from the number of credits, one round trip of command communication is performed between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 .
As a result, processing related to electronic medal bets is reliably executed by both the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is accurately managed, so that the player is not disadvantaged.

Also, as described above, when the power is cut off, the program on the dispensing control board 100 stops before the program on the main control board 50, and when the power is restored from the power cut, the program on the dispensing control board 100 starts before the program on the main control board 50.
Furthermore, when the bet switch 40 is turned on, the main control board 50 sends a deposit request command to the payout control board 100, and when the payout control board 100 receives the deposit request command, if it is able to accept the deposit request, it sends a deposit repeat command to the main control board 50, and if it is unable to accept the deposit request, it sends a deposit not possible command to the main control board 50.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 receives a deposit repeat command, it executes processing according to the electronic medal bet, and when it receives a deposit disable command, it does not execute processing according to the electronic medal bet, and if it receives neither a deposit repeat command nor a deposit disable command, it sends an deposit request command again to the payout control board 100.
Here, let us assume that after the main control board 50 transmits a deposit request command to the dispensing control board 100, a power outage occurs before the dispensing control board 100 receives the deposit request command, and the program on the dispensing control board 100 stops. In this case, the main control board 50 will not receive either the deposit repeat command or the dispensing disable command, and after the power is restored from the power outage, it will again transmit the deposit request command to the dispensing control board 100, so that commands can be transmitted and received reliably between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100.

Also, suppose that the main control board 50 sends a deposit request command to the dispensing control board 100, and the dispensing control board 100 receives the deposit request command, but before the deposit repeat command or the dispensing prohibition command can be sent to the main control board 50, a power outage occurs and the program on the dispensing control board 100 stops. In this case, after recovering from the power outage, the dispensing control board 100 sends the deposit repeat command or the dispensing prohibition command to the main control board 50, so commands can be sent and received reliably between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100.

When the power is turned on, i.e., when the power is restored from a power outage, the main control board 50 sends a start-up confirmation command to the dispensing control board 100, and when the dispensing control board 100 receives the start-up confirmation command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as is. When the main control board 50 receives back the start-up confirmation command it sent as is from the dispensing control board 100, it determines that communication between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 is normal. The dispensing control board 100 then sends a deposit repeat command or a deposit disable command to the main control board 50. Therefore, when the power is restored from a power outage, the program on the dispensing control board 100 starts before the program on the main control board 50, but the main control board 50 can reliably receive the deposit repeat command or the deposit disable command.

In addition, suppose that the main control board 50 sends a deposit request command to the dispensing control board 100, the dispensing control board 100 receives the deposit request command, and then sends a deposit repeat command or a dispensing prohibition command to the main control board 50, after which a power outage occurs and the program on the dispensing control board 100 stops. In this case, since the program on the dispensing control board 100 stops after the program on the main control board 50 stops, the main control board 50 can receive the deposit repeat command or the dispensing prohibition command sent by the dispensing control board 100, and therefore commands can be transmitted and received reliably between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100.

In Figure 4, the payout request command is a command requesting the payout control board 100 to add the payout number to the credit amount, and is a command sent from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 changes from on to off.
Furthermore, the command following the payout request command indicates the payout amount (the amount requested to be added to the credit amount based on the winning combination).

For example, when a 10-coin winning combination is achieved, the main control board 50 sends a payout request command "210AH" to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 changes from on to off, requesting that the payout number "10" be added to the credit amount.
In addition, even when the combination is not a winning combination, when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off, the main control board 50 sends a payout request command to the payout control board 100. In this case, the payout number is "0", so the payout request command is "2100H".

In addition, when the payout control board 100 receives a payout request command, it determines whether or not it is possible to accept the payout request, specifically, whether or not the upper limit of the number of credits ("10,000" in this embodiment) is exceeded by adding the number of payout coins (the number indicated by the command following the payout request command) to the number of credits.
Then, when it is determined that the payout request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that adding the payout number to the credit count still results in the number of credits being below the upper limit of the credit count, the payout control board 100 executes a process of adding the payout number to the credit count, executes a process of updating the display of the credit count display LED 76, and sends a payout repeat command to the main control board 50 (it sends the received payout request command back to the main control board 50 as is (an ACK response to the payout request command shown in FIG. 5)).

For example, when the number of credits is "50" and a payout request command "210AH" (payout of 10 coins) is received, the payout control board 100 executes a process to add the payout number "10" indicated by the command following the payout request command "210AH" to the number of credits "50", changes the display of the credit number display LED from "50" to "60", and sends a payout repeat command to the main control board 50.

In contrast, when it is determined that the payout request cannot be accepted, i.e., when it is determined that adding the payout number to the credit count would exceed the upper limit of the credit count (for example, when the credit count is 9995 and a payout request command "210AH" (payout of 10 coins) is received), the payout control board 100 does not execute the process of adding the payout number to the credit count, but sends a payout not possible command to the main control board 50 (NAK response to the payout request command shown in Figure 5).

Furthermore, when a payout repeat command is received (the sent payout request command is sent back as is from the payout control board 100), the main control board 50 determines that the request to add the payout number to the credit amount has been permitted, and executes processing according to the payout of electronic medals based on the winning combination (for example, processing to display the number of electronic medals to be paid out on the winning number display LED 78).
On the other hand, when a payout impossible command is received, the main control board 50 judges that the request to add the payout number to the credit number is not permitted, and does not execute processing for the payout of electronic medals based on the winning combination.

In this way, when the payout control board 100 is requested to add the payout number corresponding to the winning combination to the credit amount, one round trip command communication is performed between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 .
As a result, the process for paying out electronic medals based on winning combinations is reliably executed by both the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is accurately managed, so that the player is not disadvantaged.

In Figure 4, the return request command is a command requesting the payout control board 100 to return the betted electronic medals to credits, and is a command sent from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 when the cancel switch 46 is turned on.
Furthermore, the command following the return request command indicates the number of medals to be returned (the number to be added to the credits based on the return of the medals).
For example, when the cancel switch 46 is operated with three electronic medals bet, the main control board 50, when the cancel switch 46 is turned on, sends a return request command "2203H" to the payout control board 100 requesting that the return number "3" be added to the credit amount.

In addition, when the payout control board 100 receives a return request command, it determines whether or not it is possible to accept the return request, specifically, whether or not the number of credits will exceed the upper limit ("10,000" in this embodiment) by adding the number of credits to the number of return coins (the number indicated by the command following the return request command).
Then, when it is determined that the return request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that adding the return number to the credit count still results in the number of credits being below the upper limit of the credit count, the payout control board 100 executes a process to add the return number to the credit count, executes a process to update the display of the credit count display LED 76, and sends a return repeat command to the main control board 50 (it sends the received return request command back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response to the return request command shown in FIG. 5)).

For example, when the number of credits is "100" and a return request command "2203H" is received, the payout control board 100 executes a process to add the return number "3" indicated by the command following the return request command "2203H" to the number of credits "100", changes the display of the credit number display LED from "100" to "103", and sends a return repeat command to the main control board 50.

In contrast, when it is determined that the return request cannot be accepted, that is, when it is determined that adding the return number to the credit count would exceed the upper limit of the credit count (for example, when the credit count is 9999 and a return request command "2203H" is received (a return request has been made for three electronic medals)), the payout control board 100 does not execute the process of adding the return number to the credit count, but sends a non-returnable command to the main control board 50 (NAK response to the return request command shown in FIG. 5).

Furthermore, when a return repeat command is received (the returned request command that was sent is sent back as is from the payout control board 100), the main control board 50 determines that the request to add the returned number to the credit amount has been permitted, and executes processing in accordance with the return of the electronic medals (for example, processing to turn off the 1 bet display LED to 3 bet display LED, and processing to not accept operation of the start switch 41).
On the other hand, when a non-returnable command is received, the main control board 50 determines that the request to add the returned number to the credit number is not permitted, and does not execute the process corresponding to the return of the electronic medals.

In this way, when a request is made to the payout control board 100 to return the bet electronic medals to credits, one round trip command communication is performed between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 .
This ensures that the process for returning electronic medals is executed reliably by both the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is managed accurately, so that no disadvantage is caused to the player.

In Figure 6, the loan request command is a command requesting the dispensing control board 100 to add the loan number to the credit number, and is a command sent from the management device (CR unit) 200 to the dispensing control board 100 when the loan switch 202 is turned on.
Furthermore, the command following the lending request command indicates the number of medals to be lent (the number to be added to the credits based on the lending of electronic medals).

For example, when a 1,000 yen bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 201 of the management device 200 and the number of notes displayed on the number display unit 204 is "10", and the loan switch 202 is operated, the management device 200, when the loan switch 202 is turned on, sends a loan request command "4032H" to the dispensing control board 100 requesting that the number of notes to be loaned "50" be added to the credit amount.

In addition, when the dispensing control board 100 receives a loan request command, it determines whether the loan request can be accepted, specifically, whether the number of credits exceeds the upper limit value ("10,000" in this embodiment) by adding the number of loans (the number indicated by the command following the loan request command) to the number of credits.
Then, when it is determined that the loan request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of credits plus the number of loaned cards is still below the upper limit of the number of credits, the dispensing control board 100 sends a loan repeat command to the management device 200 (sends the received loan request command back to the management device 200 as is (ACK response to the loan request command shown in Figure 7)).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the loan request cannot be accepted, i.e., when it is determined that adding the loan number to the credit number would exceed the upper limit of the credit number (for example, when the credit number is "9955" and a loan request command "4032H" (loan number "50") is received), the dispensing control board 100 sends an error command "E000H" to the management device 200 (NAK response in an abnormal situation as shown in Figure 7).

In addition, when a loan repeat command is received (the loan request command sent is returned as is from the dispensing control board 100), the management device 200 sends a loan instruction command to the dispensing control board 100 to instruct it to execute the loan request, and further executes a process to update the display of the number display unit 204 according to the number of loans.

For example, when the management device 200 transmits "4032H" (lend number "50") as a loan request command to the dispensing control board 100, and then the dispensing control board 100 transmits "4032H" (ACK response to the loan request command) as a loan repeat command to the management device 200, the management device 200 transmits "4132H" as a loan instruction command to the dispensing control board 100, instructing it to add the loan number "50" to the credit amount. Furthermore, the management device 200 executes a process to subtract "10" points corresponding to the loan number "50" from the value displayed on the point display unit 204.

On the other hand, when an error command is received, the management device 200 controls the device to return to the standby state.
Furthermore, when a lending instruction command is received, the payout control board 100 executes a process of adding the lending number to the credit number, and executes a process of updating the display of the credit number display LED 76 .
For example, when the number of credits is "50" and a loan instruction command "4132H" (number of credits to be loaned "50") is received, the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of adding the number of credits to "50" by the loan number indicated by the command subsequent to the loan instruction command "4132H", and changes the display of the credit number display LED from "50" to "100".

In this way, when the management device 200 lends out electronic medals to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10, one and a half round trips of command communication are carried out between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100.
This ensures that processing relating to the lending of electronic medals is executed reliably by both the management device 200 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is managed accurately, so that no disadvantage is inflicted on the player.

In Figure 7, the lower-level counting request command and the upper-level counting request command are commands that request the management device (CR unit) 200 to pay back electronic medals, and are commands that are sent from the payout control board 100 to the management device 200 when the counting switch 47 is turned on.
Furthermore, the command following the lower-order count request command indicates the lower 8 bits when the payout number (number of credits) is expressed in 16 bits (2 bytes).
Furthermore, the command following the higher-order count request command indicates the higher-order 8 bits when the payout number (number of credits) is expressed in 16 bits.
That is, the number of coins to be paid out is determined from the command subsequent to the lower-order count request command and the command subsequent to the higher-order count request command.

As described above, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is set to "10000 (D)". Furthermore, the upper limit of the number of credits "10000 (D)" is expressed as "10011100010000 (B)" in binary, and "2710 (H)" in hexadecimal. Thus, the upper limit of the number of credits "10000 (D)" cannot be expressed in 8 bits (1 byte). For this reason, in this embodiment, the number of payouts (number of credits) is specified by 16 bits (2 bytes) of the command following the lower-order count request command and the command following the upper-order count request command.

For example, suppose that the payout control board 100 has 1000 electronic medals credited (credit number "1000 (D)") and the counting switch 47 is operated. Here, the credit number "1000 (D)" is expressed in binary as "1111101000 (B)" and in hexadecimal as "03E8 (H)". In this case, the lower counting request command is "50E8 (H)" and the upper counting request command is "5103 (H)". Then, when the counting switch 47 is turned on, the payout control board 100 sends "50E8 (H)" to the management device 200 as the lower counting request command.

Furthermore, when a lower-level counting request command is received, the management device 200 determines whether or not a withdrawal request can be accepted.
Then, when it is determined that the withdrawal request can be accepted, the management device 200 sends a lower-level counting repeat command to the dispensing control board 100 (sends the received lower-level counting request command back to the dispensing control board 100 as is (ACK response to the lower-level counting request command shown in Figure 6)).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the withdrawal request cannot be accepted, the management device 200 transmits an error command "E000H" to the dispensing control board 100 (the NAK response in the event of an abnormality shown in FIG. 6). In this case, the management device 200 controls the device to return to the standby state.

In addition, when a lower-order counting repeat command is received (the sent lower-order counting request command is sent back from the management device 200 as is), the dispensing control board 100 sends "5103 (H)" to the management device 200 as a higher-order counting request command.
In contrast, when an error command is received, the dispensing control board 100 controls the board to return to a standby state without sending a higher-level counting request command.

In addition, upon receiving the higher-order counting request command, the management device 200 sends a higher-order counting repeat command to the dispensing control board 100 (sends the received higher-order counting request command back to the dispensing control board 100 as is (ACK response to the higher-order counting request command shown in Figure 6)).
Furthermore, when a higher-order counting repeat command is received (the higher-order counting request command that was sent is sent back as is from the management device 200), the payout control board 100 sends a counting instruction command to the management device 200, and further executes a process to clear the number of credits (set it to "0") and update the display of the credit number display LED 76 (set it to "0").

Furthermore, upon receiving a count instruction command, the management device 200 controls the execution of a process to reflect the number of electronic medals to be paid out specified from the lower-level count request command and the upper-level count request command in the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200.
Thereafter, when the return switch 203 is operated, the management device 200 stores the number of electronic medals returned to the management device 200 from the slot machine 10 (payout control board 100) by operation of the counting switch 47, and the number of electronic medals corresponding to the degree displayed on the degree display unit 204, as electronic data on a card (magnetic card, IC card, etc.), and ejects the card from the ejection port of the card reader/writer 205.

In this way, when paying out electronic medals from the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 to the management device 200, one and a half round trips of command communication are carried out between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.
This ensures that the processing relating to the payout of electronic medals is executed reliably by both the payout control board 100 and the management device 200, and the number of credits is managed accurately, so that no disadvantage is caused to the player.

In this embodiment, a unique ID consisting of 4 bytes of data is set in the credit number management CPU 105. In Fig. 7, the first to fourth bytes of the CPU unique ID are a command for transmitting the first to fourth bytes of the ID unique to the credit number management CPU 105 to the management device 200.
When the power is turned on, the dispensing control board 100 sequentially transmits the first to fourth bytes of the CPU unique ID to the management device 200.

Furthermore, when the management device 200 receives the first to fourth bytes of the CPU unique ID, it stores (contains) them in a specified storage area and transmits them to the hall computer 300 in sequence.
Furthermore, when the hall computer 300 receives the first to fourth bytes of the CPU unique ID, it stores (preserves) them in a specified storage area.
Furthermore, the management device 200 and the hall computer 300 are capable of keeping the first to fourth bytes of the stored CPU unique ID as history.

For example, if the payout control board 100 is fraudulently replaced, the credit number management CPU 105 mounted on the payout control board 100 will change, and the first to fourth bytes of the CPU unique ID stored in the management device 200 and the hall computer 300 will also change at the time of the replacement.
Therefore, by checking whether the first to fourth bytes of the CPU unique ID stored in the management device 200 and the hall computer 300 have not changed in the meantime, it is possible to determine whether the payout control board 100 has been fraudulently replaced.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of a main routine in the dispensing control board 100.
In the main routine of the dispensing control board 100, when any signal is input to the input port 101 in step S101, the process proceeds to the next step S102, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process to determine whether the input signal is an on signal for the counting switch 47.
If it is determined that the signal is an ON signal from the count switch 47, the process proceeds to the next step S103, where a process for turning on the count request flag is executed, and then the process proceeds to the next step S104.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the count switch 47 is not an ON signal, step S103 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, the dispensing control board 100 executes a process to determine whether the VL signal is on or not.
If a VL signal (18V DC signal) is being supplied from the management device (CR unit) 200 to the dispensing control board 100, then in step S104, it is determined that the VL signal is on, and it is determined that the management device 200 and the dispensing control board 100 are normally connected, and the process proceeds to step S105, where the process clears the VL error flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S107.
On the other hand, if the VL signal is not supplied from the management device 200 to the dispensing control board 100, in step S104, it is determined that the VL signal is off, and it is determined that the management device 200 and the dispensing control board 100 are not connected normally, and the process proceeds to step S106, where a process of setting a VL error flag is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S107.

In step S107, the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process to determine whether the signal input (received) to the input port 101 is a main control command.
If it is determined that the input signal is a main control command, the process proceeds to the next step S108, where the dispensing control board 100 stores (preserves) the input main control command in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S109.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the input signal is not a main control command, step S108 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S109.

In step S109, the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process as to whether the stored command is a main control command or not.
If it is determined that the stored command is a main control command, the process proceeds to step S110, where the payout control board 100 executes a main control command analysis process (FIGS. 9 and 10). The details of the main control command analysis process will be described later. After the main control command analysis process is executed, the process proceeds to step S111.

In step S111, the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process as to whether or not the counting process (Figure 12) is being executed.
Here, the counting process is a process that is started when the result of step S116 described later becomes "Yes", and the details of which will be described later. Also, while the counting process is being executed, the main routine of the dispensing control board 100 can be executed in parallel with this counting process. Therefore, in step S111 of the main routine of the dispensing control board 100, a process of determining whether the counting process is being executed or not is executed.
When the counting process starts, the counting process in progress flag is set, and when the counting process ends, the counting process in progress flag is cleared. This makes it possible to determine whether the counting process is being executed or not by checking whether the counting process in progress flag is on or off.

If it is determined in step S111 that the counting process is being executed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without executing the processes in and after step S113.
If it is determined in step S111 that the counting process is being executed, the counting process being executed is continued thereafter.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S111 that the counting process is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S113, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not the lending process (Figure 11) is being executed.

Here, the loan process is a process that is started when step S118, which will be described later, becomes "Yes", and its details will be described later. Also, while the loan process is being executed, the main routine of the dispensing control board 100 can be executed in parallel with this loan process. Therefore, in step S113 of the main routine of the dispensing control board 100, a process is executed to determine whether the loan process is being executed.
When the lending process starts, the lending process in progress flag is set, and when the lending process ends, the lending process in progress flag is cleared. This makes it possible to determine whether the lending process is in progress by checking whether the lending process in progress flag is on or off.

If it is determined in step S113 that the lending process is being executed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without executing the processes in and after step S115.
If it is determined in step S113 that the lending process is currently being performed, the lending process is continued thereafter.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S113 that the lending process is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S115, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not a gaming machine command is being transmitted.

Here, the gaming machine command transmission process is a process executed when the result of step S118 described later is "No". In addition, while the gaming machine command transmission process is being executed, the main routine of the payout control board 100 can be executed in parallel with the gaming machine command transmission process. Therefore, in step S115 of the main routine of the payout control board 100, a process of determining whether or not the gaming machine command transmission process is being executed is executed.
Then, when it is determined in step S115 that the gaming machine command transmission process is being executed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without executing the processes in and after step S116.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S115 that the gaming machine command transmission process is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S116, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not the count request flag is on.

If it is determined in step S116 that the count request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S117, where the dispensing control board 100 starts the counting process (FIG. 12), and the process according to this flow chart is then terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S116 that the counting request flag is off, the process proceeds to step S118, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a process to determine whether the signal input (received) to the input port 101 is a loan request command.

If it is determined that the input (received) signal is a loan request command, the process proceeds to step S119, where the dispensing control board 100 starts the loan process (FIG. 11). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the input signal is not a loan request command, the process proceeds to step S120, where the payout control board 100 executes a gaming machine command transmission process. This process is a process for transmitting a gaming machine command to the management device 200. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

As described above, in step S111, it is determined whether or not the counting process is being performed, and if it is determined that the counting process is being performed, the counting process being performed is continued without performing the processes from step S113 onwards, and if it is determined that the counting process is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S113 and it is determined whether or not the lending process is being performed.
Also, in step S116, it is determined whether the counting request flag is on or not, and if it is determined that the counting request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S117 to start the counting process, and if it is determined that the counting request flag is off, the process proceeds to step S118 to determine whether a loan request command has been received.

In this way, the payout control board 100 is capable of executing counting processing (processing related to the refund of electronic medals) and lending processing (processing related to the lending of electronic medals), and is configured to execute counting processing in priority to lending processing by performing the process of determining whether or not counting processing is being executed before the process of determining whether or not lending processing is being executed, and by performing the process of determining whether or not the counting request flag is on before the process of determining whether or not a lending request command has been received.
Here, when the counting switch 47 is operated, the dispensing control board 100 executes the counting process.
In addition, when the loan switch 202 is operated and a loan request command is sent from the management device 200 to the dispensing control board 100, the dispensing control board 100 executes the loan process.

Furthermore, when the counting switch 47 and the lending switch 202 are operated simultaneously, the dispensing control board 100 prioritizes the counting process, so it executes the counting process and does not execute the lending process.
If the electronic medals once lent out are returned and cannot be exchanged for currency at an equivalent value, the player is disadvantaged, but by prioritizing the counting process and executing the counting process without executing the lending process, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged.

Furthermore, when the counting switch 47 is operated while the lending process is being executed, the dispensing control board 100 accepts the operation of the counting switch 47 and continues the lending process being executed, and when the lending process is completed, executes the counting process.
In other words, the payout control board 100 can accept operation of the counting switch 47 at any time, including while the lending process is being executed or while the reel 31 is spinning, and by accepting the operation of the counting switch 47, it can execute the counting process at an appropriate timing thereafter.
As a result, the electronic medals can be paid back without fail by operating the counting switch 47 once, and re-operation of the counting switch 47 can be eliminated, so that the player can be prevented from feeling bothered.

9 and 10 show the subroutine of the main control command analysis process in step S110 of Fig. 8. Fig. 10 is a flowchart continuing from Fig. 9.
As described above, the commands transmitted from the main control board 50 to the dispensing control board 100 are collectively referred to as main control commands.
Furthermore, the main control commands include the eight types of commands listed in the "Contents" column in FIG.
In the main control command analysis process, it is determined which of the eight types of commands has been received, and a process corresponding to the received command is executed.

Specifically, in the main control command analysis process, in step S131, a process of determining whether or not an error flag is on (whether or not an error has occurred) is executed.
If it is determined that the error flag is on, the process proceeds to step S132, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of sending an error command to the main control board 50. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the error flag is off, the process proceeds to step S133.

In step S133, the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process to determine whether the received command is a startup confirmation command.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is a startup confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S134, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of sending the received startup confirmation command back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response to the startup confirmation command).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is not a start confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S135.

When proceeding to step S135, the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process to determine whether the received command is a deposit request command, a return request command, or a dispensing request command, i.e., whether it is a calculation request command.
If it is determined that the received command is either an input request command, a return request command, or a withdrawal request command, that is, if it is determined that the command is a calculation request command, the process proceeds to step S138 in FIG.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is neither an input request command, a return request command nor a withdrawal request command, that is, if it is determined that the command is not a calculation request command, the process proceeds to step S136.

If the received command is a start confirmation command, step S133 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S134, and if the received command is a calculation request command (deposit request command, return request command, or payout request command), step S135 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S138 in FIG. 10. Therefore, step S135 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step S136 when a setting change start command, setting change end command, game start + RT state command, or game end + game state command is received out of the eight types of commands shown in the "Content" column in FIG. 4, i.e., when a game information command is received.

Then, in step S136, the payout control board 100 executes a process of setting the received game information command (setting change start command, setting change end command, game start + RT status command, or game end + game status command) in the management device transmission command buffer, and in the next step S137, executes a process of sending the received game information command back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response of the game information command). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In addition, when the process of setting the game information command in the command buffer for transmission to the management device is executed in step S136, the game information command stored in the command buffer for transmission to the management device will be transmitted to the management device 200 by the interrupt process on the payout control board 100 executed after this process.

Also, when proceeding to step S138 in FIG. 10, the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process as to whether or not the received command is a deposit request command.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is a deposit request command, the process proceeds to step S139, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of masking the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the deposit request command with "03H (00000011B)."
As mentioned above, the command following the input request command indicates the number of bets. The maximum number of bets is set to "3", and when three coins are input, the command following the input request command is "03H (00000011B)". In other words, the maximum number of bets can be represented by the D0 to D1 bits in the command following the input request command.

Therefore, in step S139, a process is executed to mask the command following the input request command with "03H (00000011B)." That is, an AND operation is performed on the command following the input request command and "03H (00000011B)."
This allows bits other than D0 to D1 in the command following the input request command to be set to "0", and even if noise causes bits D2 to D7 in the command following the input request command to contain a "1", this can be set to "0", preventing a number exceeding "3" from being erroneously subtracted from the number of credits when inputting credits.

Furthermore, after executing the process of step S139, the process proceeds to step S140, where the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not "(number of credits-number of bets)<0", that is, whether or not the number of credits is less than the number of bets.
If it is determined that the number of credits is less than the number of bets, the process proceeds to step S141, where the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending a deposit prohibition command to the main control board 50 (NAK response to the deposit request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In contrast, if it is determined that the number of credits is equal to or greater than the number of bets, the payout control board 100 proceeds to step S142, where it executes a process of subtracting the number of bets from the number of credits, and in the next step S143, it executes a process of sending a deposit repeat command to the main control board 50 (sending the received deposit request command back to the main control board 50 as is) (ACK response to the deposit request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Also, if it is determined in step S138 that the received command is not a deposit request command, the process proceeds to step S144, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a process to determine whether the received command is a dispensing request command or not.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is a payout request command, the process proceeds to step S145, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of masking the command following the payout request command (the lower 8 bits) with "0FH (00001111B)."
As described above, the command following the dispense request command indicates the number of coins to be dispensed. The maximum number of coins to be dispensed is set to "15", and when dispensing 15 coins, the command following the dispense request command is "0EH (00001110B)". In other words, the maximum number of coins to be dispensed can be represented by the D0 to D3 bits in the command following the dispense request command.

For this reason, in step S145, a process is executed to mask the command following the payout request command with "0FH (00001111B)." In other words, an AND operation is performed on the command following the payout request command and "0FH (00001111B)." This makes it possible to set bits other than D0 to D3 in the command following the payout request command to "0." Even if noise causes bits D4 to D7 in the command following the payout request command to contain a "1," this can be set to "0." This makes it possible to prevent a number exceeding "15" from being erroneously added to the amount of credits when paying out.

Furthermore, after executing the processing of step S145, the process proceeds to step S146, and the payout control board 100 executes a process to determine whether or not "(number of credits + number of payouts) > upper limit", that is, whether or not the number of credits plus the number of payouts exceeds the upper limit of the number of credits ("10,000" in this embodiment).
If it is determined that the credit count will exceed the upper limit when the payout number is added to the credit count, the process proceeds to step S147, where the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending a payout disable command to the main control board 50 (NAK response to the payout request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In contrast, if it is determined that adding the payout number to the credit count will not exceed the upper limit of the credit count, the payout control board 100 proceeds to step S148 and executes the process of adding the payout number to the credit count, and in the next step S149, executes the process of sending a payout repeat command to the main control board 50 (sending the received payout request command back to the main control board 50 as is) (ACK response to the payout request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Also, if it is determined in step S144 that the received command is not a dispensing request command, the process proceeds to step S150, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a process to determine whether the received command is a return request command or not.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is a return request command, the process proceeds to step S151, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of masking the command following the return request command (the lowest 8 bits) with "03H (00000011B)."
As mentioned above, the command following the return request command indicates the number of coins to be returned. Also, since the maximum number of bets is "3", the maximum number of coins to be returned is also "3". When returning three coins, the command following the return request command is "03H (00000011B)". In other words, the maximum number of coins to be returned can be represented by the D0 to D1 bits in the command following the return request command, just like the maximum number of bets.

For this reason, in step S151, a process is performed to mask the command following the return request command with "03H (00000011B)." In other words, an AND operation is performed on the command following the return request command and "03H (00000011B)." This makes it possible to set bits other than D0 to D1 in the command following the return request command to "0." Even if noise causes bits D2 to D7 in the command following the return request command to contain a "1," this can be set to "0." This makes it possible to prevent a number greater than "3" from being erroneously added to the number of credits when returning the credits.

Also, after executing the processing of step S151, the process proceeds to step S152, and the payout control board 100 executes a determination process as to whether "(number of credits + number of returned coins) > upper limit", that is, whether the number of credits plus the number of returned coins exceeds the upper limit of the number of credits ("10,000" in this embodiment).
If it is determined that adding the number of credits to the number of credits to be returned will exceed the upper limit of the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S153, where the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending a non-returnable command to the main control board 50 (a NAK response to the return request command), and the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the credit count will not exceed the upper limit even if the return number is added to the credit count, the payout control board 100 proceeds to step S154, where it executes a process of adding the return number to the credit count, and in the next step S155, it executes a process of sending a return readback command to the main control board 50 (sending the received return request command back to the main control board 50 as is) (ACK response to the return request command).Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to step S111 shown in FIG.

Fig. 11 shows a subroutine of the lending process in step S119 in Fig. 8. Note that "lending process 1" in Fig. 11 indicates a part of the lending process in step S119 in Fig. 8. Another part of the lending process is shown in Fig. 23 (referred to as "lending process 2") described later.
If it is determined in step S118 of Fig. 8 that a loan request command has been received, the process proceeds to step S119 of Fig. 8. This starts the loan process of Fig. 11. In the loan process, in step S161, the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending a loan repeat command to the management device 200 (sending the received loan request command back to the management device 200 as is) (ACK response to the loan request command). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S162.

In step S162, the dispensing control board 100 repeatedly executes the process of determining whether or not the transmission of the loan replay command has been completed until the result is "Yes", and when the result is "Yes" in step S162, the dispensing control board 100 proceeds to step S163.
When the process proceeds to step S163, the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not a management device command has been received. As described above, a management device command is a general term for a command sent from the management device 200 to the dispensing control board 100.
If it is determined in step S163 that a management apparatus command has been received, the process proceeds to step S164, where a determination process is performed as to whether or not the received management apparatus command is a lending instruction command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S163 that the management device command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S168, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process to determine whether a timeout has occurred (a specified time has elapsed since the loan repeat command was sent).
If it is determined in step S168 that a timeout has occurred, the process proceeds to step S169, where the dispensing control board 100 sets an error flag, and the process according to this flowchart is then terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S168 that the timeout has not occurred, the process of step S163 is executed again.

Also, in step S164, when it is determined that the received management device command is a loan instruction command, the process proceeds to step S165, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process as to whether or not the number of sheets to be loaned (the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the loan request command and the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the loan instruction command match).
If it is determined in step S165 that they do not match, the process proceeds to the next step S166, where the dispensing control board 100 stores (preserves) the command following the lending instruction command (lower 8 bits) as the number of cards to be dispensed in a specified memory area of the RWM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S167.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S165 that they match, step S166 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S167.

In step S167, the payout control board 100 executes a process of adding the loaned number to the credit number, and then ends the process according to this flowchart.
Also, when it is determined in step S164 that the received management device command is not a lending instruction command, the process proceeds to step S169, where the dispensing control board 100 sets an error flag, and the process according to this flowchart is then terminated.
If the error flag is set in step S169, the process proceeds to step S132 in the main control command analysis process of FIG.

Fig. 12 shows a subroutine of the counting process in step S117 in Fig. 8. Note that "counting process 1" in Fig. 12 indicates a part of the counting process in step S117 in Fig. 8. Another part of the counting process is shown in Fig. 24 (referred to as "counting process 2") described later.
If it is determined in step S116 of Fig. 8 that the counting request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S117 of Fig. 8. This starts the counting process of Fig. 12. Also, in the counting process, in step S181, the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of sending a lower-level counting request command to the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S182.

In step S182, the dispensing control board 100 repeatedly executes the process of determining whether or not the transmission of the lower-level counting request command has been completed until the result is "Yes", and when the result is "Yes" in step S182, the dispensing control board 100 proceeds to step S183.
When proceeding to step S183, the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process as to whether or not a management device command has been received.
If it is determined in step S183 that a management device command has been received, the process proceeds to step S184, where a determination process is performed as to whether the received command matches the transmitted command, i.e., whether the transmitted lower-order count request command has been returned from the management device 200 as is (the lower-order count repeat command has been received).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S183 that the management device command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S192, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process to determine whether a timeout has occurred (a specified time has elapsed since the lower-level counting request command was sent).
If it is determined in step S192 that a timeout has occurred, the process proceeds to step S194, where the dispensing control board 100 sets an error flag, and the process according to this flowchart is then terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S192 that the timeout has not occurred, the process of step S183 is executed again.

Also, in step S184, when it is determined that the received command matches the transmitted command (the transmitted lower-order count request command is returned as is from the management device 200), the process proceeds to step S185, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of transmitting the upper-order count request command to the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S186.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S184 that the received command does not match the transmitted command, the process proceeds to step S194, where the dispensing control board 100 sets an error flag, and the process according to this flowchart is then terminated.

When proceeding to step S186, the dispensing control board 100 repeatedly executes the process of determining whether or not the transmission of the higher-level count request command has been completed until the result is "Yes", and when the result is "Yes" in step S186, the process proceeds to step S187.
When proceeding to step S187, the dispensing control board 100 executes a determination process as to whether or not a management device command has been received.
If it is determined in step S187 that a management device command has been received, the process proceeds to step S188, where a determination process is performed as to whether the received command matches the transmitted command, i.e., whether the transmitted higher-order count request command has been returned from the management device 200 as is (the higher-order count repeat command has been received).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S187 that the management device command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S193, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a process to determine whether a timeout has occurred (a specified time has elapsed since the higher-level counting request command was sent).
If it is determined in step S193 that a timeout has occurred, the process proceeds to step S194, where the payout control board 100 sets an error flag, and the process according to this flowchart is then terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S193 that the timeout has not occurred, the process of step S187 is executed again.

Also, in step S188, when it is determined that the received command matches the transmitted command (the transmitted higher-level count request command is returned as is from the management device 200), the process proceeds to step S189, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a count instruction command to the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S190.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S188 that the received command does not match the transmitted command, the process proceeds to step S194, where the dispensing control board 100 sets an error flag, and the process according to this flowchart is then terminated.

When proceeding to step S190, the dispensing control board 100 repeatedly executes the process of determining whether or not the transmission of the count instruction command has been completed until the result is "Yes", and when the result is "Yes" in step S190, the process proceeds to step S191.
When the process proceeds to step S191, the payout control board 100 executes a process of clearing the number of credits (setting it to "0"), and then ends the process according to this flowchart.
If the error flag is set in step S194, the process proceeds to step S132 in the main control command analysis process of FIG.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of a main routine in the main control board 50.
When power is applied to the main control board 50, a power-on process is performed in step S201. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S202.
In step S202, a determination is made as to whether the setting key switch 12 is on.

If it is determined in step S202 that the setting key switch 12 is on, the process proceeds to step S203, where a setting change process is executed, and when the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to step S211.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S202 that the setting key switch 12 is off, the process proceeds to step S204, where a game return process is executed. Then, when the game return process is completed, the process proceeds to step S211.
When the process proceeds to step S211, a process of determining whether to bet three coins or one coin is executed. If it is determined that a three coin bet is to be made, the process proceeds to step S205, and if it is determined that a one coin bet is to be made, the process proceeds to step S206.

When the process proceeds to step S205, a three-bet process (FIG. 16) is executed. This process is a process for betting three of the credited electronic medals based on the operation of the three-bet switch 40b. The three-bet process will be described in detail later. Then, when the three-bet process is completed, the process proceeds to step S212.
When the process proceeds to step S206, the one-coin bet process (FIG. 17) is executed. This process is a process for betting one of the credited electronic medals based on the operation of the one-coin bet switch 40a. The one-coin bet process will be described in detail later. Then, when the one-coin bet process is completed, the process proceeds to step S212.

When the process proceeds to step S212, a start or cancel decision process is executed. If the process determines that the process should be started, the process proceeds to step S207, and if the process determines that the process should be cancelled, the process proceeds to step S210.
When the process proceeds to step S207, a game start process (FIG. 18) is executed. This process is a process for starting a game based on the operation of the start switch 41. The game start process will be described in detail later. Then, when the game start process ends, the process proceeds to the next step S208.

In step S208, a game end process (FIG. 19) is executed. This process is executed when the stop switch 42 is operated and the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, and the game is ended. The game end process will be described in detail later. Then, when the game end process is ended, the process proceeds to the next step S209, and a payout process (FIG. 20) is executed. This process is executed to pay out electronic medals based on the winning combination. Then, when the payout process is ended, the process returns to step S211.
When the process proceeds to step S210, a return process (FIG. 21) is executed. This process is a process for returning the bet electronic medals to credits based on the operation of the cancel switch 46. Then, when the return process is completed, the process returns to step S211.

Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of the power-on processing in the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100.
In FIG. 14, the flowchart on the left shows the flow of the power-on process in the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right shows the flow of power-on process 1 in the dispensing control board 100. Note that "power-on process 1" in FIG. 14 indicates that this is a part of the power-on process in the dispensing control board 100. Another part of the power-on process is illustrated in FIG. 22 (referred to as "power-on process 2"), which will be described later. Also, in FIG. 14, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands sent and received between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 during the power-on process.
14 and FIGS. 15 to 21 described later show the command transmission and reception status between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100.
23 to 25, which will be described later, show the command transmission and reception status between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200.

When the slot machine 10 is powered on, power is supplied from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100. Then, the program on the main control board 50 starts, and the program on the payout control board 100 starts. At this time, the power-on process is executed on the main control board 50, and power-on process 1 is executed on the payout control board 100.

First, a description will be given of the power-on process in the main control board 50 shown on the left side of Fig. 14. The flow chart shown on the left side of Fig. 14 shows the subroutine of the power-on process in step S201 of Fig. 13.
In step S301, the main control board 50 executes an initialization process. When the initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S302.
When the process proceeds to step S302, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a startup confirmation command to the dispensing control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S303.
In step S303, the main control board 50 executes a response waiting process. This process waits for an ACK response to the start-up confirmation command from the dispensing control board 100.

Then, when the transmitted start confirmation command is returned as is from the dispensing control board 100 (ACK response is received), the process according to this flowchart ends. When the process according to this flowchart ends, the process proceeds to step S202 shown in FIG.
In contrast, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the startup confirmation command was sent and there is no ACK response to the startup confirmation command (a timeout occurs), or an error command is sent from the dispensing control board 100 (a NAK response is received), the process proceeds to step S304, and the main control board 50 executes a process to decrement the retransmission counter.
The resend counter is a counter for counting the number of times the start confirmation command is resent, and is set to an initial value of "2" when the start confirmation command is first transmitted.
The initial value of the retransmission counter is not limited to "2", but may be, for example, "3".

Furthermore, when the process of decrementing the retransmission counter is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S305, where the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether the retransmission counter is "0" or not.
If it is determined that the retransmission counter is "0", the process proceeds to the next step S306, where the main control board 50 executes error processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the retransmission counter is not "0", step S302 is executed again.

Next, the power-on process 1 in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the right side of Figure 14 will be described.
In step S401, the dispensing control board 100 executes an initialization process. Then, when the initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S402.
In step S402, the dispensing control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a startup confirmation command sent from the main control board 50. Then, when the startup confirmation command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S403, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process for sending the received startup confirmation command back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response to the startup confirmation command). Then, when the received startup confirmation command is sent back to the main control board 50 as is, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Figure 15 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing in the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100.
In Fig. 15, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the setting change processing in the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the setting change processing in the dispensing control board 100. Also, in Fig. 15, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts show the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 during the setting change processing.

First, a description will be given of the setting change processing in the main control board 50 shown on the left side of Fig. 15. The flow chart shown on the left side of Fig. 15 shows the subroutine of the setting change processing in step S203 of Fig. 13.
If the setting key switch 12 is on when the power is turned on, the main control board 50 executes a setting change process. In this setting change process, in step S311, a process is executed to send a setting change start command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S312.
In step S312, the main control board 50 executes a response waiting process. This process waits for an ACK response to the setting change start command from the payout control board 100.
Here, when the transmitted setting change start command is sent back as is from the dispensing control board 100, the main control board 50 judges that there has been an ACK response to the setting change start command from the dispensing control board 100, and proceeds to the setting value change in progress processing in step S203. This processing switches the display of the setting value from "1" → "2" → ... → "6" → "1" → ... each time the setting switch 13 is operated, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed setting value is confirmed. Then, when the setting value change in progress processing ends, the processing proceeds to step S313.

In contrast, if a predetermined time has passed since the setting change start command was sent and there is no ACK response to the setting change start command (a timeout occurs), or an error command is sent from the dispensing control board 100 (a NAK response is received), the process returns to step S311 and the main control board 50 again executes the process of sending the setting change start command to the dispensing control board 100.
Also, when the process proceeds to step S313, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a setting change end command to the dispensing control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S314.

In step S314, the main control board 50 executes a response waiting process. This process is a process of waiting for an ACK response to the setting change end command from the payout control board 100.
Here, when the transmitted setting change end command is sent back as it is from the dispensing control board 100, the main control board 50 judges that there is an ACK response to the setting change end command from the dispensing control board 100, and ends the processing according to this flowchart. Note that when the processing according to this flowchart ends, the processing proceeds to step S211 shown in FIG. 13.
In contrast, if a predetermined time has passed since the setting change end command was sent and there is no ACK response to the setting change end command (a timeout occurs), or an error command is sent from the dispensing control board 100 (a NAK response is received), the process returns to step S313 and the main control board 50 again executes the process of sending the setting change end command to the dispensing control board 100.

Next, the flow of the setting change processing in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the right side of Figure 15 will be explained.
In step S411, the dispensing control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a setting change start command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the setting change start command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S412, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process for sending the received setting change start command back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response to the setting change start command). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S413.

When the process proceeds to step S413, the dispensing control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving the setting change end command sent from the main control board 50. Then, when the setting change end command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S414, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a process for sending the received setting change end command back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response to the setting change end command). Then, when the received setting change end command is sent back to the main control board 50 as is, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the flow of three-coin bet processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In Fig. 16, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of three-coin bet processing in the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of three-coin bet processing in the payout control board 100. Also, in Fig. 16, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts show the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during three-coin bet processing.

Also, FIG. 16 shows an example in which, during a three-coin bet process, a one-coin insertion request command ("2001H") is sent three times to request that the bet number "1" be subtracted from the credit number.
In addition, when processing a three-coin bet, it is not limited to sending a one-coin insertion request command three times, but it is also possible to send a three-coin insertion request command ("2003H") once to request that the bet number "3" be subtracted from the number of credits.

First, a description will be given of the three-coin bet process in the main control board 50 shown on the left side of Fig. 16. The flow chart shown on the left side of Fig. 16 shows the subroutine of the three-coin bet process in step S205 of Fig. 13.
In step S321, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not a specified number of electronic medals have been bet. If it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have been bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In contrast, if it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have not been bet, the process proceeds to the next step S323 when the operation (ON) of the 3-bet switch 40b is detected in the next step S322.
In step S323, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a one-coin insertion request command to the dispensing control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S324.

In step S324, the main control board 50 executes a response waiting process. This process waits for a one-coin insertion repeat command to be sent from the dispensing control board 100 (an ACK response to the one-coin insertion request command).
Then, when the one-coin insertion repeat command is received (the sent one-coin insertion request command is sent back as is from the dispensing control board 100), the main control board 50 determines that an ACK response to the one-coin insertion request command has been received from the dispensing control board 100 and proceeds to step S325.

In contrast, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the one-coin insertion request command was sent in step S323 but the one-coin insertion repeat command is not received (a timeout occurs), or an error command is sent from the dispensing control board 100 (a NAK response is received), the process returns to step S323 and the main control board 50 again executes the process of sending the one-coin insertion request command to the dispensing control board 100.
After that, the main control board 50 executes the same processes as steps S323 and S324 in steps S325 and S326, and steps S327 and S328. That is, the same processes as steps S323 and S324 are executed three times. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. When the process according to this flowchart ends, the process proceeds to step S212 shown in FIG. 13.

Next, the three-coin bet process in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side of FIG. 16 will be described.
In step S421, the dispensing control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a one-coin insertion request command sent from the main control board 50. Then, when the one-coin insertion request command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S422, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process for sending a one-coin insertion repeat command to the main control board 50 (sending the received one-coin insertion request command back to the main control board 50 as is) (ACK response to the one-coin insertion request command). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S423.
Thereafter, the dispensing control board 100 executes the same processes as steps S421 and S422 in steps S423 and S424, and steps S425 and S426. That is, the same processes as steps S421 and S422 are repeatedly executed three times. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the flow of single bet processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In Fig. 17, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of single bet processing in the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of single bet processing in the payout control board 100. Also, in Fig. 17, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts show the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during single bet processing.

First, a description will be given of the one-coin bet process in the main control board 50 shown on the left side of Fig. 17. The flow chart shown on the left side of Fig. 17 shows the subroutine of the one-coin bet process in step S206 of Fig. 13.
In step S331, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not a specified number of electronic medals have been bet. If it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have been bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In contrast, if it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have not been bet, the process proceeds to the next step S333 when the operation (ON) of the 1 bet switch 40a is detected in the next step S332.
In step S333, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a one-coin insertion request command to the dispensing control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S334.

In step S334, the main control board 50 executes a response waiting process. This process waits for a one-coin insertion repeat command to be sent from the dispensing control board 100 (an ACK response to the one-coin insertion request command).
Then, when the one-coin insertion repeat command is received (the one-coin insertion request command sent is returned as is from the dispensing control board 100), the main control board 50 determines that there has been an ACK response to the one-coin insertion request command from the dispensing control board 100, and ends the processing according to this flowchart. Note that when the processing according to this flowchart ends, the processing proceeds to step S212 shown in FIG.

In contrast, if the one-coin insertion request command is sent in step S333 and the one-coin insertion repeat command is not received within a predetermined time (a timeout occurs), or an error command is sent from the dispensing control board 100 (a NAK response is received), the process returns to step S333 and the main control board 50 executes the process of sending the one-coin insertion request command to the dispensing control board 100 again.

Next, the one-coin bet process in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side of FIG. 17 will be described.
In step S431, the dispensing control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a one-coin insertion request command sent from the main control board 50. Then, when the one-coin insertion request command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S432, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process for sending a one-coin insertion repeat command to the main control board 50 (sending the received one-coin insertion request command back to the main control board 50 as is) (ACK response to the one-coin insertion request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the flow of game start processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In Fig. 18, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of game start processing in the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of game start processing in the payout control board 100. Also, in Fig. 18, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts show the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during game start processing.

First, a description will be given of the game start processing in the main control board 50 shown on the left side of Fig. 18. The flow chart shown on the left side of Fig. 18 shows a subroutine of the game start processing in step S207 of Fig. 13.
In step S351, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not a specified number of electronic medals have been bet. If it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have not been bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In contrast, if it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have been bet, the process proceeds to the next step S353 when the operation (ON) of the start switch 41 is detected in the next step S352.
In step S353, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a game start + RT state command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S354.
In step S354, the main control board 50 executes a response waiting process. This process is a process of waiting for a game start + RT state command to be sent back from the payout control board 100 (ACK response).

Then, when the transmitted game start + RT state command is returned as is from the payout control board 100, the main control board 50 judges that there is an ACK response from the payout control board 100 and ends the processing according to this flowchart. When the processing according to this flowchart ends, the processing proceeds to step S208 shown in FIG.
In contrast, if a predetermined time has passed since sending the game start + RT status command in step S353 and there is no ACK response (a timeout occurs), or an error command is sent from the payout control board 100 (a NAK response is received), the process returns to step S353 and the main control board 50 again executes the process of sending the game start + RT status command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the game start processing in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side of Figure 18 will be described.
In step S451, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a game start + RT state command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the game start + RT state command is received, the payout control board 100 proceeds to the next step S452, and executes a process for sending the received game start + RT state command back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of game ending processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In Fig. 19, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of game ending processing in the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of game ending processing in the payout control board 100. Also, in Fig. 19, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts show the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during game ending processing.

First, there will be described the game ending process in the main control board 50 shown on the left side of Fig. 19. The flow chart shown on the left side of Fig. 19 shows the subroutine of the game ending process in step S208 of Fig. 13.
In step S361, the main control board 50 executes a process to determine whether the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that is to stop last) has changed from on to off. If it is determined that the third stop switch 42 has not been turned off, the process according to this flowchart ends. In contrast, if it is determined that the third stop switch 42 has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S362.
In step S362, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a game end + game status command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S363.
In step S363, the main control board 50 executes a response waiting process. This process is a process of waiting for a game end + game status command to be sent back from the payout control board 100 (ACK response).

Then, when the transmitted game end + game status command is returned as is from the payout control board 100, the main control board 50 judges that an ACK response has been received from the payout control board 100, and ends the processing according to this flowchart. When the processing according to this flowchart ends, the processing proceeds to step S209 shown in FIG.
In contrast, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the game end + game status command was sent in step S362 and there is no ACK response (a timeout occurs), or an error command is sent from the payout control board 100 (a NAK response is received), the process returns to step S362 and the main control board 50 again executes the process of sending the game end + game status command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the game ending process in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side of FIG. 19 will be described.
In step S461, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a game end + game status command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the game end + game status command is received, the payout control board 100 proceeds to the next step S462, and executes a process for sending the received game end + game status command back to the main control board 50 as is (ACK response). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout process in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In Fig. 20, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the payout process in the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the payout process in the payout control board 100. Also, in Fig. 20, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts show the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the payout process.

First, a description will be given of the payout process in the main control board 50 shown on the left side of Fig. 20. The flow chart shown on the left side of Fig. 20 shows the subroutine of the payout process in step S209 of Fig. 13.
In step S371, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a payout request command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S372.
In step S372, the main control board 50 executes a response waiting process. This process is a process of waiting for a payout repeat command to be sent from the payout control board 100 (an ACK response to the payout request command).

Then, when the payout repeat command is received (the payout request command sent is returned as is from the payout control board 100), the main control board 50 determines that an ACK response to the payout request command from the payout control board 100 has been received, and ends the process according to this flowchart. When the process according to this flowchart ends, the process returns to step S211 shown in FIG.
In contrast, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the dispensing request command was sent in step S371 and the dispensing repeat command is not received (a timeout occurs), or an error command is sent from the dispensing control board 100 (a NAK response is received), the process returns to step S371 and the main control board 50 again executes the process of sending a dispensing request command to the dispensing control board 100.

Next, the dispensing process in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the right side of Figure 20 will be described.
In step S471, the dispensing control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a dispensing request command sent from the main control board 50. Then, when the dispensing request command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S472, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process for sending a dispensing repeat command to the main control board 50 (sending the received dispensing request command back to the main control board 50 as is) (ACK response to the dispensing request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the flow of the return processing in the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100.
In Fig. 21, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the return process in the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the return process in the dispensing control board 100. Also, in Fig. 21, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts show the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 during the return process.

First, a description will be given of the return process in the main control board 50 shown on the left side of Fig. 21. The flow chart shown on the left side of Fig. 20 shows the subroutine of the return process in step S210 of Fig. 13.
In step S341, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not there are any electronic medals that have been bet. If it is determined that there are no electronic medals that have been bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In contrast, if it is determined that there are electronic medals that have been bet, the process proceeds to the next step S343 when the operation (ON) of the cancel switch 46 is detected in the next step S342.
In step S343, the main control board 50 executes a process of sending a return request command to the dispensing control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S344.
In step S344, the main control board 50 executes a response waiting process. This process waits for a return repeat command to be sent from the payout control board 100 (an ACK response to the return request command).

Then, when the return repeat command is received (the returned request command is returned as is from the dispensing control board 100), the main control board 50 determines that an ACK response to the return request command from the dispensing control board 100 has been received, and ends the process according to this flowchart. When the process according to this flowchart ends, the process returns to step S211 shown in FIG.
In contrast, if a specified time has elapsed since the return request command was sent in step S343 and the return repeat command is not received (a timeout occurs), or an error command is sent from the dispensing control board 100 (a NAK response is received), the process returns to step S343 and the main control board 50 again executes the process of sending a return request command to the dispensing control board 100.

Next, the return process in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the right side of Figure 21 will be described.
In step S441, the dispensing control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a return request command sent from the main control board 50. Then, when the return request command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S442, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process for sending a return repeat command to the main control board 50 (sending the received return request command back to the main control board 50 as is) (ACK response to the return request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the flow of the power-on processing in the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200.
In Fig. 22, the left flowchart shows the flow of power-on processing 2 in the dispensing control board 100, and the right flowchart shows the flow of power-on processing in the management device 200. Also, in Fig. 22, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts show the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200 during the power-on processing.
When the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 are powered on, a program on the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 is started, and a program on the management device 200 is started. At this time, a power-on process is executed on the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10, and a power-on process is executed on the management device 200.

Here, the power-on process 1 in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the right side of Fig. 14 and the power-on process 2 in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the left side of Fig. 22 are both processes executed in the dispensing control board 100 when the power is turned on, and some of the processes overlap. And the same step numbers are assigned to processes with the same content.
However, in the power-on process 1 for the dispensing control board 100 shown on the right side of Figure 14, only the processes necessary to explain the sending and receiving of commands between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100 are extracted and illustrated, and other processes are omitted from the illustration.
In contrast, in the power-on process 2 in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the left side of Figure 22, the processes necessary to explain the sending and receiving of commands between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200 are extracted and illustrated, and other processes are omitted from the illustration.

First, the power-on process 2 in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the left side of Figure 22 will be described.
In step S401, the dispensing control board 100 executes an initialization process. When the initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S502. Note that step S401 in FIG. 22 and step S401 in FIG. 14 are the same process.
When the process proceeds to step S502, the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of sequentially transmitting the first byte to the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID to the dispensing control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S503.
In step S503, the main control board 50 executes a process to determine whether or not transmission of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID has been completed. If it is determined that transmission of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID has been completed, the process according to this flowchart ends. In contrast, if it is determined that transmission of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID has not been completed, the process returns to step S502, and the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of transmitting the first byte to the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID to the dispensing control board 100 again in sequence.

Next, the power-on process in the management device 200 shown on the right side of FIG. 22 will be described.
In step S601, the management device 200 executes an initialization process. When the initialization process ends, the process proceeds to the next step S602.
In step S602, the management device 200 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving the first to fourth bytes of the CPU unique ID transmitted from the dispensing control board 100. Then, when the first to fourth bytes of the CPU unique ID are received, the process proceeds to the next step S603, where the management device 200 executes a process for determining whether or not the received command is a CPU unique ID.

If it is determined in step S603 that the received command is a CPU unique ID, the process proceeds to the next step S604, where the management device 200 executes a process of storing (saving) the first through fourth bytes of the received CPU unique ID in a predetermined storage area, and then proceeds to the next step S605.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S603 that the received command is not a CPU unique ID, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S605, the management device 200 executes a process of determining whether or not reception of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID has been completed.
Then, when it is determined in step S605 that reception of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID has been completed, the process proceeds to the next step S606, in which the management device 200 executes a process of transmitting the first byte through the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID to the hall computer 300. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S605 that reception of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID has not been completed, step S606 is skipped and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the flow of the loan processing in the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200.
In Fig. 23, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the lending process 2 in the dispensing control board 100, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the lending process in the management device 200. Also, in Fig. 23, the arrow between the left and right flowcharts shows the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200 during the lending process.

Here, the loan process 1 in the dispensing control board 100 shown in Fig. 11 and the loan process 2 in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the left side in Fig. 23 both show subroutines of the loan process in step S119 in Fig. 8, and some of the processes are overlapping. And the same step numbers are given to processes with the same content.
However, in the loan process 1 in the dispensing control board 100 shown in Figure 11, the processing during the loan process is illustrated in detail.
In contrast, in the loan process 2 in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the left side of Figure 23, the processes necessary to explain the sending and receiving of commands between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200 are extracted and illustrated, and other processes are omitted from the illustration.

First, the lending process in the management device 200 shown on the right side of FIG. 23 will be described.
In step S611, when the operation (ON) of the lending switch 202 is detected, the process proceeds to the next step S612, where the management device 200 executes a process of turning off the lending possible LED, a process of invalidating (not accepting) the operation of the lending switch 202, and a process of invalidating (not accepting) the operation of the return switch 203. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S613.
The loanable LED is an LED that indicates whether or not the electronic medal can be loaned. When lit, it indicates that the electronic medal can be loaned, and when off, it indicates that the electronic medal cannot be loaned.

In step S613, the management device 200 transmits a lending request command to the dispensing control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S614.
In step S614, the management device 200 executes a response waiting process. This process is a process of waiting for a loan repeat command to be transmitted from the dispensing control board 100 (an ACK response to the loan request command).

Then, when the loan repeat command is received (the loan request command that was sent is sent back as is from the dispensing control board 100), the management device 200 determines that an ACK response to the loan request command has been received from the dispensing control board 100, and proceeds to the next step S615.
Also, if an error command is sent from the dispensing control board 100 (a NAK response is received), the process proceeds to step S617.
Furthermore, if the lending repeat command is not received within a predetermined time period since the lending request command was sent in step S613 (timeout occurs), the process proceeds to step S618, and the management device 200 executes error processing.

In step S615, the management device 200 transmits a lending instruction command to the dispensing control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S616.
In step S616, the management device 200 executes a process of subtracting the number of sheets lent, and then proceeds to the next step S617.
In step S617, the management device 200 executes a process of turning on the lending possible LED, a process of making the operation of the lending switch 202 valid (acceptable), and a process of making the operation of the return switch 203 valid (acceptable), and then ends the process according to this flowchart.

Next, the loan process 2 in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the left side of Figure 23 will be described.
In step S511, the dispensing control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a loan request command transmitted from the management device 200. Then, when the loan request command is received, the process proceeds to step S118.

When the process proceeds to step S118, the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of determining whether the received command is a lending request command. Note that step S118 in FIG. 23 and step S118 in FIG. 8 are the same process.
If it is determined that the received command is a loan request command, the process proceeds to step S513, where the payout control board 100 executes a process of storing (saving) the received loan request command in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S514.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is not a loan request command, the process according to this flowchart ends.

When proceeding to step S514, the payout control board 100 executes a process to determine whether or not the loan request can be accepted, specifically, whether or not adding the number of credits to the number of loans (the number indicated by the command following the loan request command) will exceed the upper limit of the number of credits.
Here, in step S514, when it is determined that the loan request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the credit count plus the loan number is equal to or less than the upper limit of the credit count, the process proceeds to step S161, where the payout control board 100 transmits a loan repeat command to the management device 200 (sends the received loan request command back to the management device 200 as is) (ACK response to the loan request command).Then, the process proceeds to step S164.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S514 that the loan request cannot be accepted, i.e., if it is determined that adding the loan number to the credit number would exceed the upper limit of the credit number, the process proceeds to step S515, where the payout control board 100 sends an error command to the management device 200 (NAK response). Then, the process proceeds to step S169, where the payout control board 100 executes a process to set an error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

When proceeding to step S164, the dispensing control board 100 executes a process to determine whether or not a loan instruction command has been received.
If it is determined in step S164 that a lending instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step S167, where the payout control board 100 adds the number of cards to be lent to the number of credits, and the process according to this flowchart is then terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S164 that the lending instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S169, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process of setting an error flag, and then ends the process according to this flowchart.
It should be noted that steps S161, S164, S167, and S169 in FIG. 23 and steps S161, S164, S167, and S169 in FIG. 11 are identical in content to each other.

24 and 25 are flow charts showing the flow of the counting process in the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200. FIG. 25 is a flow chart continuing from FIG.
24 and 25, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the counting process in the dispensing control board 100, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the counting process in the management device 200. Also, in Fig. 24 and 25, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts show the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200 during the counting process.

Here, counting process 1 in the dispensing control board 100 shown in Fig. 12 and counting process 2 in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the left side in Fig. 24 and Fig. 25 each show a subroutine of the counting process in step S117 in Fig. 8, and some processes are overlapping. And, the same step numbers are given to processes with the same content.
However, in counting process 1 in the dispensing control board 100 shown in Figure 12, the processing during counting is illustrated in detail.
In contrast, in counting process 2 in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the left side of Figures 24 and 25, the processes necessary to explain the sending and receiving of commands between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200 are extracted and illustrated, and other processes are omitted from the illustration.

First, the counting process in the dispensing control board 100 shown on the left side in Figures 24 and 25 will be described.
In step S181, the dispensing control board 100 transmits a lower-level counting request command to the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to step S533.
In step S533, the dispensing control board 100 executes a response waiting process. This process is a process of waiting for a lower-level counting repeat command to be transmitted from the management device 200 (an ACK response to the lower-level counting request command).

Then, when the lower-level counting repeat command is received (the lower-level counting request command that was sent is sent back as is from the management device 200), the dispensing control board 100 determines that an ACK response to the lower-level counting request command has been received from the management device 200, and proceeds to step S185.
Moreover, if an error command is sent from the management device 200 (a NAK response is received), the process according to this flowchart ends.
Furthermore, if the lower count repeat command is not received within a predetermined time after the lower count request command is sent in step S181 (timeout occurs), the process proceeds to step S194, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process to set an error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S185, the dispensing control board 100 transmits a higher-level count request command to the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to step S535 in FIG.
In step S535, the dispensing control board 100 executes a response waiting process. This process is a process of waiting for a higher-order count repeat command to be transmitted from the management device 200 (an ACK response to the higher-order count request command).

Then, when the higher-order counting repeat command is received (the higher-order counting request command that was sent is sent back as is from the management device 200), the dispensing control board 100 determines that an ACK response to the higher-order counting request command has been received from the management device 200, and proceeds to step S189.
In response to this, if an error command is sent from the management device 200 (there is a NAK response), or if the higher-order count repeat command is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the higher-order count request command was sent in step S185 of Fig. 24 (timeout occurs), the process proceeds to step S194, where the dispensing control board 100 executes a process to set an error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
The error processing in step S538 in FIG. 24 and the error processing in step S538 in FIG. 25 are the same processing.

When proceeding to step S189, the dispensing control board 100 sends a counting instruction command to the management device 200 and proceeds to step S191.
In step S191, the amount of credits is cleared (set to "0"), and the process according to this flowchart is then terminated.
24 and 25 and steps S181, S185, S189, S191 and S194 in FIG. 12 are identical in content to each other.

Next, the counting process in the management device 200 shown on the right side in FIGS. 24 and 25 will be described.
In step S631, the management device 200 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a lower-level count request command transmitted from the dispensing control board 100. Then, when the lower-level count request command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S632.

In step S632, the management device 200 executes a process of determining whether the received command is a lower-level count request command.
If it is determined in step S632 that the received command is a lower-level count request command, the process proceeds to the next step S633, where the management device 200 executes a process of storing (saving) the received lower-level count request command in a predetermined storage area, and then proceeds to the next step S634.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S632 that the received command is not a lower-order count request command, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S634, the management device 200 executes a process of determining whether or not a counting (withdrawal) request can be accepted.
Here, when it is determined in step S634 that the counting (refund) request can be accepted, the process proceeds to step S636, where the management device 200 executes a process of turning off the loan available LED, a process of invalidating (not accepting) the operation of the loan switch 202, and a process of invalidating (not accepting) the operation of the return switch 203. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S637.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S634 that the counting (withdrawal) request cannot be accepted, the process proceeds to step S635, where the management device 200 transmits an error command to the dispensing control board 100 (NAK response), and the process according to this flowchart is then terminated.

In step S637, the management device 200 executes a process of transmitting a lower-level counting repeat command to the dispensing control board 100 (sending the received lower-level counting request command back to the dispensing control board 100 as is) (ACK response to the lower-level counting request command). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S638.
In step S638, the management device 200 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a higher-order count request command transmitted from the dispensing control board 100. Then, when the higher-order count request command is received, the process proceeds to step S639 in FIG.

In step S639, the management device 200 executes a process of determining whether the received command is a higher-order count request command.
If it is determined in step S639 that the received command is a higher-order count request command, the process proceeds to step S641, where the management device 200 executes a process of storing (saving) the received higher-order count request command in a predetermined storage area, and then proceeds to step S642.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S639 that the received command is not a higher-order count request command, the process proceeds to step S640, where the management device 200 transmits an error command to the payout control board 100 (NAK response). Then, the process proceeds to step S647, where the management device 200 executes error processing.

In step S642, the management device 200 executes a process of transmitting a higher-order counting repeat command to the dispensing control board 100 (sending the received higher-order counting request command back to the dispensing control board 100 as is) (ACK response). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S643.
In step S643, the management device 200 executes a command reception process. This process is a process for receiving a counting command transmitted from the dispensing control board 100. Then, when the counting command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S644.

In step S644, the management device 200 executes a process of determining whether the received command is a count instruction command.
If it is determined that the received command is a count instruction command, the process proceeds to the next step S645, where the management device 200 executes a process of reflecting the payout number specified from the lower-level count request command and the higher-level count request command in the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S646.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is not a count instruction command, the process proceeds to step S647, and the management device 200 executes error processing.

When the process proceeds to step S646, the management device 200 executes a process of turning on the loan available LED, a process of enabling (enabling) the operation of the loan switch 202, and a process of enabling (enabling) the operation of the return switch 203. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Figure 26 is a diagram showing the waveforms of the data signal and strobe signal of serial communication between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200.
Figures 23 to 25 show commands such as a loan request command, a lower counting request command, and a higher counting request command sent and received between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200, but as described above, these commands are composed of a preceding command (upper 8 bits) and a subsequent command (lower 8 bits).

In FIG. 26, the preceding command and the following command that make up these commands are treated as one unit, and the waveforms of the data signals and strobe signals are shown.
As shown in Figure 26, data signals are transmitted one bit at a time between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200, from bit D0 (DB0) to bit D7 (DB7), and these are read one bit at a time when the strobe signal is on.

FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing the on/off states of each signal when an electronic medal is lent.
Figure 23 shows the commands sent and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 when an electronic medal is lent, while Figure 27 shows the on/off timing of each signal of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 when an electronic medal is lent.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 are powered on, the operation of the return switch 203 of the management device 200 becomes acceptable.
After that, the data signals of the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 become "0", and the strobe signals of the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 turn off.
Thereafter, the management device 200 becomes capable of accepting operation of the lending switch 202, and the operating state changes from the standby state to the normal state. Note that the normal state means a state in which the management device 200 is capable of lending electronic medals, and the game on the slot machine 10 is capable of proceeding.

Then, when operation (on) of the loan switch 202 of the management device 200 is detected, first, operation of the loan switch 202 and return switch 203 of the management device 200 is rendered unacceptable, and then the preceding command and succeeding command of the loan request command are sequentially sent from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10.
Thereafter, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the loan replay command are sequentially transmitted from the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 to the management device 200 .
Thereafter, the management device 200 sequentially transmits the preceding command and the succeeding command of the lending instruction command to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 .
Then, when the transmission of the lending instruction command is completed, the management device 200 becomes ready to accept operations of the lending switch 202 and the return switch 203 .

FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing the on/off states of each signal during counting (withdrawal) of electronic medals.
Figures 24 and 25 show the commands sent and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 when counting electronic medals, while Figure 28 shows the on/off timing of each signal of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 when counting electronic medals.

As shown in FIG. 28, when the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 are powered on, the operation of the return switch 203 of the management device 200 becomes acceptable.
After that, the data signals of the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 become "0", and the strobe signals of the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 turn off.
Thereafter, the management device 200 becomes ready to accept operations of the lending switch 202, and the operating state changes from the standby state to the normal state. Up to this point, the process is the same as in FIG.

Then, when operation (on) of the counting switch 47 of the slot machine 10 is detected, first, operation of the loan switch 202 and the return switch 203 of the management device 200 is rendered unacceptable, and then the preceding command and the succeeding command of the lower-level counting request command are sequentially transmitted from the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 to the management device 200.
Thereafter, the management device 200 sequentially transmits the preceding command and the succeeding command of the lower count replay command to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 .

Thereafter, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the higher-level count request command are sequentially transmitted from the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 to the management device 200 .
Thereafter, the management device 200 sequentially transmits the preceding command and the succeeding command of the higher-order count replay command to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 .
Thereafter, the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 sequentially transmits the preceding command and the succeeding command of the count instruction command to the management device 200 .
Then, when the transmission of the count instruction command is completed, the management device 200 becomes ready to accept operations of the lending switch 202 and the return switch 203 .

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, the various commands shown in FIGS. 4 to 7 are configured as 16-bit data consisting of a preceding command (upper 8 bits) and a succeeding command (lower 8 bits). However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured as, for example, 8 bits or 32 bits.

(2) In this embodiment, commands are sent and received via serial communication between the main control board 50 and the dispensing control board 100, and between the dispensing control board 100 and the management device 200, but this is not limited to this, and parallel communication may also be used, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.
(3) In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the main control board 50 sends a one-coin insertion request command three times to the payout control board 100 when the 3-bet switch 40b is turned on, but this is not limited to this, and the main control board 50 may also send a three-coin insertion request command once.

(4) In this embodiment, the main control board 50 sent a payout request command to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 changed from on to off, but this is not limited to this, and the payout request command may also be sent when all reels 31 have stopped.
(5) In this embodiment, when the third stop switch 42 changes from on to off, the main control board 50 sends a payout request command with the number of coins to be paid out being “0” to the payout control board 100, even when no winning combination is achieved. However, this is not limited to the above, and it is not necessary for the main control board 50 to send a payout request command when no winning combination is achieved.

(6) In this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of one of the gaming machines, but the slot machine 10 is not limited to a "reel type gaming machine" (so-called "pachislot gaming machine") installed in a type 4 business hall that is subject to the Entertainment and Amusement Act, and can also be applied to, for example, a casino machine. In addition, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine.
(7) All of the embodiments and various modified examples described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in any appropriate combination.

Second Embodiment
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is a medal-less gaming machine that does not use medals as tangible objects, similar to the first embodiment.
Here, the term "medalless gaming machine" refers to a machine that does not use medals as physical objects.
For this reason, even though it is a "medalless gaming machine," it is the same as conventional gaming machines in that it uses gaming media (gaming value) for play, and the gaming media used for play in a medalless gaming machine are sometimes simply referred to as "medals."
Therefore, when referring to a "medal," it does not only refer to a tangible object, but may also refer to an intangible object (for example, electronic data).
Furthermore, medals as intangible objects may be referred to as game media, game value, points (or simply "points"), electronic medals, electronic data, electronic information, electronic game media, electronic game value, etc. In the following description of the second embodiment, "medals" as intangible objects used in the gaming machine 10 (medalless gaming machine) are referred to as "game media".

"Lending" refers to transmitting gaming media necessary for playing a game from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10.
The term "credit" refers to storing (accumulating, crediting) gaming media in the gaming machine 10. The term "credited gaming media" corresponds to data stored in the RWM 103 of the gaming media count control board 100.
A "bet" refers to placing a bet on gaming media to play a game. When the bet switch 40 (the 1 bet switch 40a or the 3 bet switch 40b) is operated, a predetermined number of gaming media is bet from among the gaming media corresponding to the data stored in the RWM 103 of the gaming media count control board 100.
"Bet" is also called "insertion." Note that "insertion" does not only refer to inserting actual medals into the gaming machine through the medal insertion slot, but also includes betting gaming media (electronic medals) by operating the bet switch 40.

"Settlement" refers to returning the bet game media to the RWM 103 of the game media count control board 100 (to credits), and is performed by operating the settlement switch 46. "Settlement" may also be called "return" or "cancellation." Therefore, the "settlement switch 46" may also be called the "return switch 46" or the "cancellation switch 46."
When the bet switch 40 is operated in a situation where gaming media are stored as data (credits) in the RWM 103 of the gaming media number control board 100, a predetermined number of gaming media are bet (added as the number of bets), and the data (number of credits) in the RWM 103 of the gaming media number control board 100 is subtracted by the number of bets. On the other hand, when the settlement switch 46 is operated in a situation where gaming media have been bet, the number of bets (number of gaming media) up to that point becomes "0", and the number of bets up to that point is added to the RWM 103 of the gaming media number control board 100 (returned to credits).

The term "award" refers to adding a number of gaming media corresponding to the payout of a winning combination to the credit amount stored in the gaming machine 10 based on the winning combination.
"Awarding" is also called "payout." Note that "payout" does not only refer to the discharge of actual medals from the medal return port, but also includes the process of adding the number of game media stored in the RWM 103 of the game media count control board 100, the number of game media corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination, to the number of game media stored in the RWM 103 of the game media count control board 100, when the minor winning combination is won.
In the second embodiment, the "payout means 67" in the first embodiment is referred to as "amount of award control means 67".
"Counting" refers to returning (credited) gaming media stored in the gaming machine 10 (RWM 103 of the gaming media count control board 100) to the lending unit 200, and is performed by operating the counting switch 47. When the counting switch 47 is operated, a predetermined number of gaming media stored in the gaming machine 10 is subtracted, and the subtracted amount of gaming media is added to the lending unit 300 side.

"Returning" game media from the rental unit 200 means storing the number of game media stored in the rental unit 200 in a game media number storage medium (magnetic card, IC card, IC coin, etc.) and discharging it to the outside (player). When storing the number of game media stored in the rental unit 200 in the game media number storage medium, a reader/writer is used (the rental unit 200 has a built-in reader/writer).
As mentioned above, "settlement" may be referred to as "return," but in the second embodiment, "return" refers to storing the number of gaming media stored in the lending unit 200 in a gaming media number storage medium and discharging it to the outside (player).

The LEDs used in the second embodiment, such as the set value display means 73 and the role ratio monitor 113, each digit is composed of seven segments. And "seven segments" means that in addition to seven segment elements, they also have a DP (decimal point) segment.

"Notification" corresponds to sending (outputting) a message from the gaming machine 10 to the rental unit 200, or from the rental unit 200 to the gaming machine 10, and is synonymous with "transmission" and "output."
In the following, for example, the gaming machine information notification may be referred to as "sending" the gaming machine information notification, or, for example, the gaming machine information may be referred to as "notifying" the gaming machine information.

At least a part of the storage area of the RWM or ROM may be referred to as a "storage area" or a "storage means", both of which have the same meaning.
Also, a control board (main, sub, etc.) may be referred to as a "control means." Furthermore, a CPU may be referred to as a "control means."

29 is a block diagram of the gaming machine 10 (slot machine) in the second embodiment. Note that, although the gaming machine 10 is called the "slot machine 10" in the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is called the "gaming machine 10" in the second embodiment.
Also, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as the "main control board 50", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as the "main control board 50". Similarly, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as the "sub-control board 80", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as the "sub-control board 80". However, the main control board may be referred to as the main control board, and the sub-control board may be referred to as the sub-control board (both have the same meaning).
In addition, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as the "payout control board 100", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as the "game media number control board 100". However, the game media number control board may also be referred to as the payout control board, and both have the same meaning.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, it is called the "credit number display LED 76", but in the second embodiment, it is called the "game media number display unit 121". Both have the same function and are composed of, for example, a five-digit LED.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, it is called the "acquired number display LED 78", but in the second embodiment, it is called the "award number display unit 78". Both have the same function and are composed of, for example, a two-digit LED.

When the main control board 50 is regarded as one of the main control boards, the game media number control board 100 is the other of the main control boards. For this reason, the RWM 53, ROM 54, and CPU 55 of the main control board 50 may be referred to as the first main control RWM 53, the first main control ROM 54, and the first main control CPU 55, respectively.
In addition, the RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105 of the game media number control board 100 may be referred to as a second main control RWM 103, a second main control ROM 14, and a second main control CPU 105, respectively.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the management device (CR unit) 200 is referred to as a "management device (CR unit) 200", but in the second embodiment, the rental unit 200 is referred to as a "rental unit 200". Both have the same function. The rental unit 200 may also be referred to as a "dedicated unit 200".
One lending unit 200 is provided for one gaming machine 10. In other words, one lending unit 200 is a device dedicated to one gaming machine 10.
In contrast, the hall computer 300 electrically connected to the lending unit 200 may be provided for each lending unit 200, or one hall computer 300 may be provided for multiple lending units 200.
Similarly, the management computer 400 electrically connected to the lending unit 200 may be provided for each lending unit 200 (the lending unit 200 and the management computer 400 may be connected one-to-one), or one management computer 400 may be provided for multiple lending units 200.

The hall computer 300 is a computer for collecting data for the operation of the hall, such as the number of games played on the day, the number of ins (throws in), the number of outs (awarded), MY (number of differences, number of coins difference), the number of times the device was activated, the number of loans, etc.
The control computer 400 is a computer for transmitting information to the outside (for example, an external center outside the hall). Like the hall computer 300, the control computer 400 is also installed in the hall.
In FIG. 29, the hall computer 300 and the management computer 400 are provided separately, but these may also be integrated into one computer.

In the main control board 50, as part of the memory area of the RWM 53, a bet number memory means 53a and an award number memory means 53b are provided.
The bet number storage means 53a stores the current number of bets.
Meanwhile, a bet number display unit 77 is connected to the main control board 50. The bet number display unit 77 is a device that displays the bet number stored in the bet number storage means 53a, and is composed of, for example, a two-digit LED.
The awarded number storage means 53b stores the number of awarded game media when a predetermined number of game media are awarded based on the winning of a minor combination.
Meanwhile, a number-of-gifts display unit 78 is connected to the main control board 50. The number-of-gifts display unit 78 is a device that displays the number of gifts stored in the number-of-gifts storage means 53b, and is composed of, for example, a two-digit LED.

Furthermore, although not shown in the first embodiment (Figure 1), a setting value display means 73 is mounted on the main control board 50. The setting value display means 73 is composed of, for example, a single-digit LED, and can display the current setting value in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. On the other hand, the role ratio monitor 113, which will be described later, is mounted on the game media number control board 100, not on the main control board 50. However, this is not limiting, and the role ratio monitor 113 may also be mounted on the main control board 50.

The gaming media number control board 100 is also referred to as the second main control board (means), payout control board (means), medal count control board (means), medal count display control board (means), or gaming media number display control board (means). Like the main control board 50, the gaming media number control board 100 requires security to prevent fraud, and is therefore housed in a board case and sealed with a crimp (sealing member) to make it difficult to open the board case (access to the gaming media number control board 100).

Like the main control board 50, the game media count control board 100 has an independent RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105. These RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105 may be built into a single chip. The game media count control board 100 is configured to control the display of the game media count display unit 121, transmit information to the lending unit 200 via the connection terminal board 130, and receive information from the lending unit 200 via the connection terminal board 130. It is also configured to transmit information to the main control board 50 and receive information from the main control board 50. In FIG. 29, the direction of the arrows between each board indicates the direction of transmission and reception of information. Therefore, the main control board 50 and the game media count control board 100 are configured to be able to communicate bidirectionally.

In FIG. 29, the main control board 50 and the game media number control board 100 are configured as separate bodies, but it is also possible to configure them from a single main control board. However, even in this case, the first main control RWM 53, the first main control ROM 54, the first main control CPU 55, the second main control RWM 103, the second main control ROM 104, and the second main control CPU 105 will be provided on one board.

The RWM 103 of the game media count control board 100 includes game media count storage means 103a (also referred to as a "game media count storage area (_NB_MEDAL)") for storing the number of game media (number of credits). When game media are awarded as a result of a small winning combination, the number of game media (data) in the game media count storage means 103a is updated (added).
Furthermore, when gaming media are bet to start a game, the gaming media (data) in the gaming media number storage means 103a are updated (subtracted) by the number of gaming media corresponding to the number of bets.

A game media number display board 120 is electrically connected to the game media number control board 100. A game media number display unit 121 is mounted on this game media number display board 120. The game media number display unit 121 displays the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a, and is composed of, for example, a five-digit LED.
For example, assume that the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "100." In this case, the game medium number display unit 121 displays "100."

When the 3 bet switch 40b is operated to start a game, the bet operation signal is sent from the main control board 50 to the gaming media count control board 100. The gaming media count control board 100 determines whether or not the bet is possible based on the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media count storage means 103a, and when it determines that the bet is possible, it sends a bet signal to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 receives the bet signal, it executes a bet process and stores the number of bets in the bet count storage means 53a. When the number of bets stored in the bet count storage means 53a is updated from "0" to "3", the display (lowest digit) of the bet number display unit 77 is also updated from "0" to "3".

In addition, when the gaming media number control board 100 transmits a bet signal to the main control board 50 as described above, it updates the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a. In this example, the number of gaming media is updated from "100" to "97". When the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a is updated from "100" to "97", the display on the gaming media number display unit 121 is also updated from "100" to "97".

A settlement switch 46 is connected to the main control board 50. The settlement switch 46 is a switch that is operated when returning the gaming media that have been bet (in other words, when resetting the number of bets to "0").
When the number of bets is stored in a bet number storage means 53a and is displayed on a bet number display section 77, if a settlement switch 46 is operated before a start switch 41 is operated (before a game is started), the number of bets is returned (returned to the original state).
For example, as in the above example, when "3" is stored in the bet number storage means 53a and "97" is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, when the settlement switch 46 is operated, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is updated from "3" to "0." As a result, the display on the bet number display unit 77 is updated from "3" to "0."

In addition, based on the operation of the settlement switch 46, a settlement signal (a signal equivalent to returning the bet number "3") is sent from the main control board 50 to the gaming media number control board 100. Upon receiving this settlement signal, the gaming media number control board 100 updates the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a from "97" to "100". As a result, the display on the gaming media number display unit 121 is updated from "97" to "100".

In this way, the settlement switch 46 is used to reset the betted game media (to reset the bet number to "0"). Therefore, even if the settlement switch 46 is operated, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is not subtracted.
Furthermore, even if the settlement switch 46 is operated when the number of bets is not stored in the bet number storage means 53a, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a remains "0", and the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a also remains the same.
In order to start such a settlement process, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 46 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 46 has not been operated, the settlement process is not started, and if the settlement switch 46 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "0." Furthermore, if the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "0," the settlement process is not started, and if the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is not "0," the settlement process is started.
As a result, when comparing a situation in which the settlement switch 46 is operated with a situation in which the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "0", the number of situations in which the settlement switch 46 is operated is relatively small, so by first determining whether or not the settlement switch 46 is operated, it is possible to reduce the processing burden.

When the start switch 41 is operated when the number of bets is "3", the number of bets for that game is confirmed and the game starts (the reels 31 start spinning). In this case, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a may be cleared when the start switch 41 is operated (when the game starts), or may be cleared when all the reels 31 stop. When the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is cleared, the display on the bet number display unit 77 is also updated to "0".

In the game, for example, when a minor combination with a prize number of "8" is won, the main control board 50 stores "8" in the prize number storage means 53b. When the value stored in the prize number storage means 53b is updated to "8", the display (the last digit) of the prize number display unit 78 is also updated from "0" to "8".
Furthermore, when game media are awarded, an award (payout) signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game media count control board 100. When the game media count control board 100 receives the award signal, it adds the number of game media corresponding to the award signal to the number of game media stored in the game media count storage means 103a. In this example, the number of game media stored in the game media count storage means 103a is updated from "97" to "105". When the number of game media stored in the game media count storage means 103a is updated from "97" to "105", the display on the game media number display unit 121 is also updated from "97" to "105".

In addition, after the award number is stored in the award number storage means 53b, the award number stored in the award number storage means 53b is cleared when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated (at the start of the game) or when all the reels 31 of the next game are stopped. When the award number stored in the award number storage means 53b is cleared, the display of the award number display unit 78 is also updated to "0."

The game medium number display unit 121 is configured to display error information corresponding to the error that has occurred.
In this case, error information may be displayed instead of the number of game media displayed on the game medium number display unit 121, or the number of game media and the error information may be displayed alternately. For example, the number of game media may be displayed for "3" seconds → error information may be displayed for "3" seconds → the number of game media may be displayed for "3" seconds → .... In addition, when the game medium number display unit 121 is composed of a five-digit LED, if the error information to be displayed is, for example, "E1", it may be displayed as "000E1", "---E1", "E1000", "E1---", etc.

Here, if the game medium count display unit 121 does not display error information corresponding to the error that occurred, the awarded number display unit 78 may display the error information corresponding to the error that occurred. In this case, the awarded number display unit 78 may display the error information after displaying the number of awarded game media. For example, as described above, if the awarded number is "8", the awarded number display unit 78 may display (count up) "00" → "01" → "02" → ... "07" → "08", and then display "E1" (an example of an error code).

The counting switch 47 is electrically connected to the game media number control board 100. Although not shown, the counting switch 47 is provided on the control panel of the gaming machine 10, for example, in the same manner as the bet switch 40 and the like.
When the counting switch 47 is operated, the game media (information) stored in the game media number storage means 103a can be transmitted to the lending unit 200 via the connection terminal board 130. For example, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the game media number "200" is stored in the game media number storage means 103a, the information "200" is transmitted as a count value to the connection terminal board 130, and then the information "200" can be transmitted as a count value to the lending unit 200. Then, the counting switch 47 is operated, and "0" is stored in the game media number storage means 103a after the count value is transmitted.

In addition, when the counting switch 47 is operated while the gaming medium number display unit 121 displays "200," if the counting switch 47 is operated and the count value "200" is sent to the rental unit 200, the display on the gaming medium number display unit 121 is updated to "0."

The game media number control board 100 is provided with a total game media number clear switch 112. When the total game media number clear switch 112 is operated, it is possible to clear (store "0") the (total) number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a of the game media number control board 100. When the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is cleared, the number of game media displayed on the game media number display unit 121 is also updated to "0".
It should be noted that the information cleared by operating the total number of game media clear switch 112 is only the total number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a, and other information is not cleared.

For example, when the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "3" and the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a is "1000," if the total number of gaming media clear switch 112 is operated, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a remains "3," but the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a becomes "0." In other words, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is not cleared by operating the total number of gaming media clear switch 112.
Similarly, when "50" is stored as the number of lendable game media in the lendable game media number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200 and the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is "1000," if the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated, the number of lendable game media stored in the lendable game media number storage means 206 remains "50," but the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a becomes "0." In other words, the number of lendable game media stored in the lendable game media number storage means 206 is not cleared by operating the total number of game media clear switch 112.

The total game media number clear switch 112 may be operated by pressing it once, by pressing it for a predetermined period of time, or by turning on the power while the switch is pressed. The total game media number clear switch 112 is located in a position where the player cannot operate it, such as on the game media number control board 100, inside the cabinet of the gaming machine 10, or on the back of the front door of the gaming machine 10.
When the number of game media is cleared by operating a total game media number clear switch 112, a total game media number clear status is turned on, the on status is maintained until one game ends, and the total game media number clear status is turned off after the one game ends.
Information on the total number of game media clear status may be transmitted to the lending unit 200. When the lending unit 200 receives information that the total number of game media clear status is on, it clears the total number of game media stored in the lending unit 200. In addition, when lending game media are granted from the lending unit 200 in a situation where the total number of game media clear status is on in the gaming machine 10, the total number of game media clear status remains on and the number of loaned game media is newly added to the number of game media storage means 103a.

The total game media number clear switch 112 is invalid even if it is operated during play, and is valid when it is operated during game standby (before play begins or after play ends). In this case, the game media number control board 100 determines whether or not play is in progress based on game start information and game end information sent from the main control board 50, and invalidates the operation of the total game media number clear switch 112 when play is in progress.

However, the total gaming media number clear switch 112 may be enabled by operation during play. In this case, the total gaming media number clear status is changed from ON to OFF based on the end of the next game of the game in which the total gaming media number clear switch 112 was operated. In other words, the total gaming media number clear status is maintained ON at the end of the game in which the total gaming media number clear switch 112 was operated, and the total gaming media number clear status is turned OFF when the next game ends. This makes it possible to maintain the total gaming media number clear status ON for the next game even if the total gaming media number clear status is only ON for a short time (the total gaming media number clear switch 112 is operated just before the end of the game), thereby preventing fraud such as clearing the total gaming media number.

The total game media count clear status may be turned off after the end of a game in which the total game media count clear switch 112 is operated. In this case, capacity can be reduced by standardizing the program that updates the total game media count clear status.

The role ratio monitor 113 displays a predetermined ratio, and is composed of, for example, a 4-digit LED (7 segments (including a DP segment)). In the second embodiment, the interrupt period of the game media number control board 100 is set to "1" ms. The interrupt period of the main control board 50 is "2.235" ms.
Four interrupts constitute one cycle, and the four-digit LED of the winning ratio monitor 113 is dynamically lit. Specifically, for example, an LED display counter is provided, and for each interrupt,
"00000001(B)"
"00000010(B)"
"00000100(B)"
"00001000(B)"
Configure it to cycle through.

When the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)", the LED in the ones digit of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (other LEDs are turned off), when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", the LED in the tens digit of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (other LEDs are turned off), when the LED display counter is "00000100 (B)", the LED in the hundreds digit of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (other LEDs are turned off), and when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)", the LED in the thousands digit of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (other LEDs are turned off).

Of the four LEDs that make up the winning ratio monitor 113, the two LEDs on the left (thousands and hundreds) are called "identification segments" and display the type of information. The two LEDs on the right (tens and ones) are called "ratio segments" and display the calculated ratio.
In the second embodiment, the role ratio monitor 113 repeatedly displays the following six items of information (1) to (6) as ratios at predetermined time intervals.
(1) Indicated role ratio (cumulative) (7P.), or advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) (7U.)
(2) Continuous feature ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
(3) Ratio of gimmicks (6000 games) (7 y.)
(4) Ratio of consecutive features (cumulative) (6A.)
(5) Role Ratio (Cumulative) (7A.)
(6) Ratio of features, etc. (cumulative) (5H.)

When a ratio is displayed using the discrimination segment and the ratio segment, the DP segment in the ones digit of the discrimination segment is lit to clearly distinguish the boundary between the discrimination segment and the ratio segment. In this case, the DP segments in the tens digit of the discrimination segment and the tens and ones digits of the ratio segment are not lit.
In the above notation, for example, "P." means that "P" is displayed by the seven segments in the ones digit of the identification segment, and the DP segment of the seven segments is lit.

For example, when displaying the command-included reel ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7P." indicating the command-included reel ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Here, "cumulative" refers to the sum of the values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, the count continues until the number of games played reaches at least "175,000."
Even after the number of games reaches 175,000 or more, the counter continues to add until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in the memory area of a specified address of the RWM 103.
In addition, "6000 games" refers to the total number of games played over 15 sets, each set consisting of "400" games.

The ratios of the above six items are explained below.
(1) Ratio of accessories including instructions (cumulative total)
The "ratio of game devices including instructions (cumulative)" is a ratio in which the cumulative number of awards ("number of awards" refers to the number of gaming media awarded; the same applies below) is used as the denominator and the sum of the cumulative number of awards when game devices are activated that are awarded by the operation of the game devices (RB, CB, SB) and the cumulative number of instruction awards that are awarded by the operation of the instruction function is used as the numerator.
The above "sum" means, first, when a memory area for storing the number of points awarded when the reel is activated and a memory area for storing the number of points awarded by command are provided separately, the sum of the values stored in both memory areas. Secondly, when a single memory area (a reel counter with command) is provided for storing both the number of points awarded when the reel is activated and the number of points awarded when the command function is activated (hereinafter referred to as the "number of points awarded by command-included reel"), the sum of the values in the single memory area is equal to the value in the single memory area.

For example, if the number of plays is "175,000" or more, the cumulative number of awards is "200,000," and the cumulative number of command-included feature awards is "100,000," the command-included feature ratio is calculated as "50." Note that "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total for all plays. For example, if the cumulative number of awards reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "1,677,215") or if the cumulative number of plays plus the number of plays in the current play exceeds the upper limit, the cumulative number of awards and the sum of the cumulative number of awards when features are activated and the cumulative number of command awards are not updated in subsequent plays.

In addition, the "operation of the instruction function" corresponds to a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 for obtaining a favorable game result is notified (instructed) in a game in which a winning combination (winning number) that gives an advantageous/disadvantageous game result is obtained according to the operation mode of the stop switch 42. For example, it corresponds to a game in which the correct push order is notified when the so-called push order bell is won.
In addition, in a gaming machine 10 that is not equipped with a special feature, the "special feature ratio including instructions" is the cumulative number of instructions granted by the operation of the instruction function divided by the total number of instructions granted.

Regarding the "number of awards in a game in which the instruction function is activated," when a small prize of, for example, "15" is won based on the stop switch 42 being operated in the displayed push order in a game in which the instruction function is activated, "15" is added to the number of awards of the instructed game device and the total number of awards.
In contrast, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from that displayed, resulting in a small win with an award number of, for example, "3,""3" is added to the number of instructed game items awarded and the total number of awards.
In addition, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from that displayed and a winning combination is missed (when the combination is not a winning combination), the number of instructed combinations awarded and the total number of combinations awarded will be the same as in the previous game.

In addition, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from that displayed, causing a winning combination to be missed, a process may be executed to add "0" to the number of instructed game items awarded and the total number of awarded items, so that the values of both award numbers (counters) become the same as in the previous game.

(2) Favorable zone ratio (cumulative)
The "profitable zone ratio (cumulative)" is a ratio in which the cumulative number of times of play is the denominator and the cumulative number of times of play in the profitable zone is the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of times of play is "20,000" and the cumulative number of times of play in the profitable zone is "18,000", the profitable zone ratio is calculated as "90".
In addition, the "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total of all games. For example, when the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "65535"), the cumulative number of games and the number of games in the advantageous zone are not updated in subsequent games.
Either the "command-included feature ratio (cumulative)" or the "advantageous zone ratio (cumulative)" is displayed depending on the specifications of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, a gaming machine equipped with an instruction function displays the "command-included feature ratio (cumulative)" and does not need to display the "advantageous zone ratio (cumulative)." In contrast, a gaming machine not equipped with an instruction function displays the "advantageous zone ratio (cumulative)" and does not display the "command-included feature ratio (cumulative)."

(3) Ratio of consecutive games (6,000 games), Ratio of consecutive games (cumulative)
The "consecutive feature ratio (6000 games)" is a ratio in which the number of prizes awarded for 6000 games is the denominator and the number of prizes awarded when the continuous feature (RB) is activated during 6000 games is the numerator.
In addition, the "continuous feature ratio (cumulative)" is a ratio in which the number of awards in the cumulative number of games is the denominator and the number of awards when the continuous feature (RB) is activated is the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of games is a predetermined number (e.g., 17,500 times) or more, the number of awards in the cumulative number of games is "20,000", and the cumulative number of awards when the continuous feature is activated is "10,000", the continuous feature ratio (cumulative) is calculated as "50".
In addition, the "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total for all games. For example, if the cumulative total number of awarded items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "65535"), or if the cumulative total number of awarded items added to the current game exceeds the upper limit, the cumulative total number of awarded items and the cumulative number of awarded game media when consecutive game items are activated are not updated in subsequent games.

(4) Ratio of features (6,000 games), Ratio of features (cumulative)
"Gem ratio (6000 games)" is a ratio in which the number of prizes awarded for 6000 games is the denominator and the number of prizes awarded when the gems (RB, CB, SB) are activated during 6000 games is the numerator.
In addition, the "reel ratio (cumulative)" is a ratio in which the number of awards in the cumulative number of times played is the denominator and the number of awards when the reels (RB, CB, SB) are activated in the cumulative number of times played is the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of times played is a predetermined number (e.g., 17,500 times) or more, the cumulative number of awards is "20,000", and the cumulative number of awards when the reels are activated is "10,000", the reel ratio (cumulative) is calculated as "50".
In addition, the "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total for all games. For example, if the cumulative number of awarded prizes reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "65535"), or if the cumulative number of awarded prizes added to the current game exceeds the upper limit, the cumulative number of awarded prizes and the cumulative number of awarded game media when the game device is activated are not updated in subsequent games.

(5) Ratio of features and other conditions (cumulative)
The "Ratio of the state of the reels, etc. (cumulative)" is a ratio in which the cumulative number of times played is the denominator and the number of times played with the reels (RB, CB, SB) in operation or the number of times played with the consecutive reels (1BB, 2BB) in operation is the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of times played is "20,000" and the cumulative number of times played with the reels in operation or the consecutive reels in operation is "5,000", the ratio of the state of the reels, etc. (cumulative) is calculated as "25".
For example, when the cumulative number of times of play reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "175,000"), the cumulative number of times of play and the number of times of play when the special device is activated and when the consecutive special device is activated are not updated in subsequent games.

In addition, in gaming machines that do not have the functions corresponding to the above six items, the ratio segment will be displayed as "--".
For example, if the machine is not equipped with an "RB (first type special feature)", there is no continuous feature ratio, so when the "continuous feature ratio (6000 games)" and "continuous feature ratio (cumulative)" are displayed, the ratio segment is displayed as "--".

Furthermore, when the ratio is calculated and there is a decimal point, the decimal point is discarded before display. For example, when the ratio is calculated and the result is "49.99", it is displayed as "49".
Furthermore, when the ratio is calculated to be "100", it is displayed as "99".
In addition, if the ratio is calculated to be less than 10, the tens digit will be displayed as 0. For example, if the ratio is calculated to be 9%, it will be displayed as 09.

The identification segment and ratio segment of the role ratio monitor 113 may be displayed flashing.
First, if the ratio is equal to or greater than a threshold, the ratio segment is displayed blinking.
The threshold values (%) for each ratio are as follows:
(1) Indicated role ratio (cumulative) or advantageous zone ratio (cumulative): 70
(2) Continuous feature ratio (6000 games): 60
(3) Ratio of bonuses (6000 games): 70
(4) Continuous feature ratio (cumulative): 60
(5) Role ratio (cumulative): 70
(6) Ratio of features and other conditions (cumulative): 50
Therefore, for example, when the command-included reel ratio (cumulative) is "69," the ratio segment will be lit to "69" when the command-included reel ratio (cumulative) is displayed, but when it is "70," it will be displayed in a flashing manner.

Secondly, when the cumulative number of games does not reach the reference number of games, the identification segment is displayed in a flashing manner.
The standard number of plays for each ratio is as follows:
(1) Indicated role ratio (cumulative) or advantageous zone ratio (cumulative): 175,000
(2) Continuous feature ratio (6000 games): 6000
(3) Ratio of bonuses (6000 games): 6000
(4) Continuous feature ratio (cumulative): 17,500
(5) Gambling ratio (cumulative): 17,500
(6) Status ratio of special items (cumulative): 175,000

Therefore, for example, when the cumulative number of plays is "6000", the identification segment (6y.) is displayed in a lit state when the consecutive feature ratio (6000 plays) is displayed. On the other hand, when the cumulative number of plays is "5999", the identification segment (6y.) is displayed in a blinking state when the consecutive feature ratio (6000 plays) is displayed.
In addition, if the cumulative number of games played is less than "400" which is the number of games played per set of counting units, "00" is displayed in the ratio segment.

Furthermore, when the identification segment or ratio segment is displayed in a flashing manner, it is preferable that one flashing cycle, consisting of a lighting time of 0.3 seconds and an off time of 0.3 seconds, be 0.6 seconds, with a tolerance of ±10%.
In the second embodiment, switching between on and off in the blinking display is managed (controlled) as follows.
First, the RWM 103 is provided with "blink switching time (_TM_CHG_FLS)" (2 bytes) as a timer area for managing the blink switching time.

The blinking switching time is initialized (stores "0") when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and is incremented by "1" for each interrupt. As described above, one interrupt time is "1" ms. Furthermore, the blinking switching time is configured to cycle between "0" and "299".
In addition, the RWM 103 includes a "blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS)" (1 byte) as a flag for determining whether the light is on or off.
The blinking switch flag is initialized (stores "0") when the power is turned on, and thereafter switches between "0" and "1" every "300" ms. "0" indicates that the light is on, and "1" indicates that the light is off.

To update the blinking switching time, a process is performed in which "299" is subtracted from the current timer value. Specifically, the process is as follows.
Example 1) When the initial value is "0" and an update process is performed, the result becomes "0-299=298". At this time, a borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes "1".
Example 2) When the blinking switching time is "298", updating process results in "298-299=1". At this time, a borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes "1".
Example 3) When the blinking switching time is "299", if an update process is performed, the result will be "299-299=0". In this case, since no borrow occurs, the carry flag becomes "0".

Then, as a result of updating the blinking switching time, if the carry flag is "1", the blinking switching flag is not updated, and if the carry flag is "0", the blinking switching flag is updated. In this way, the blinking switching flag is switched every "300" ms. Specifically, it is as follows.
Example 1) When the blinking switch flag is "0" (on), performing an update process changes it to "1" (off).
Example 2) When the blinking switch flag is "1" (off), performing update processing changes it to "0" (on).

Furthermore, the role ratio monitor 113 displays a test pattern to enable confirmation of whether or not each LED segment element operates normally.
The test pattern displays "8.8.8.8." (all segment elements of all LEDs (including segment DP)) until the number of times the carry flag becomes "0" reaches "16" after the power is turned on, that is, until "300 ms x 16 times = 4,800 ms" has elapsed.
In addition, since each of the four digit LEDs of the role ratio monitor 113 is dynamically lit for each interrupt (1 ms), strictly speaking, all four LEDs are not lit at the same time.

After the test pattern is displayed for 4,800 ms, the display transitions to the above-mentioned (1) advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) or instructed feature ratio (cumulative) through (6) feature, etc. state ratio (cumulative), with (1) through (6) each being displayed for 4,800 ms and this is repeated.
Therefore,
Power on ↓
(0) Test pattern display (4800 ms)
↓
(1) Display of the indicated role ratio (cumulative) or advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) (4800 ms)
↓
(2) Continuous feature ratio (6000 plays) display (4800 ms)
↓
(3) Role ratio (6000 games) display (4800 ms)
↓
(4) Continuous feature ratio (cumulative) display (4800 ms)
↓
(5) Display of bonus ratio (cumulative) (4800 ms)
↓
(6) Display of the status ratio (cumulative) of reels, etc. (4800 ms)
↓
(1) Display of the indicated role ratio (cumulative) or advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) (4800 ms)
↓
:
It becomes.
As with the test pattern, each of the ratios (1) to (6) is displayed until the number of times the carry flag becomes "0" reaches "16" (300 ms x 16 times = 4800 ms).

As described above, when the discrimination segment or the ratio segment is displayed in a flashing manner, the segment is repeatedly turned on for "300" ms and turned off for "300" ms (one period is "600" ms).
Then, when the time for turning on or off the light is T1 and the time for displaying the test pattern or ratio is T2,
T2 = T1 x 2 x n (n is a natural number)
By setting this, the timing of switching between on and off can be made to coincide with the timing of switching between the test pattern display or the ratio display, making it possible to provide a good-looking display and preventing a person looking at the role ratio monitor 113 from mistakingly thinking that there may be a malfunction.
In the above, when "T1" is set to "300" ms, "T2" is a multiple of "600" ms. However, in order to set each ratio display time to "5000 ms±10%, "T2" should be set to "4800" ms.

For example, if you want to flash the favorable zone ratio after flashing the test pattern,
Test pattern (lights for 300 ms. Total 300 ms.)
↓
Test pattern (lights off for 300 ms. Total 600 ms.)
↓
:
↓
Test pattern (lights for 300 ms. Total 4500 ms.)
↓
Test pattern (off for 300 ms. Total 4800 ms. Test pattern display completed.)
↓
Favorable zone ratio (lights on for 300 ms)
↓
Advantageous zone ratio (lights off for 300 ms)
↓
:
It becomes.

In this way, when lighting up some information, the lighting can be maintained for 300 ms. In other words, it is possible to prevent the lighting up of some information from going out before 300 ms has elapsed after the lighting up of some information has started. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the lighting up of some information from disappearing immediately after the lighting up of some information has started (leading to the mistaken belief that there may be a malfunction).

Returning to the block diagram of FIG.
The sub-control board 80 is similar to the sub-control board 80 of the first embodiment (FIG. 1), and therefore a description thereof will be omitted. However, the RWM 83, ROM 84, and CPU 85 of the sub-control board 80 may be referred to as the sub-control RWM 83, the sub-control ROM 84, and the sub-control CPU 85, respectively.
The performance lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 are also similar to those in the first embodiment.
The connection terminal board (also referred to as the “game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board”) 130 serves as a relay board for two-way communication between the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200 .

The lending unit 200 corresponds to the management device 200 in the first embodiment (FIG. 1). As in the first embodiment, a lending switch 202, a return switch 203, and the like are provided.
In addition, the loanable gaming media number display unit 204 corresponds to the degree display unit 204 in the first embodiment, and displays the maximum number of gaming media that can be loaned from the loan unit 200 to the gaming machine 10, and is composed of, for example, a three-digit LED.

Furthermore, the lendable gaming media number storage means 206 stores the maximum number of gaming media that can be lent from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10, and is composed of, for example, an RWM provided inside the lending unit 200. The number of lendable gaming media stored in the lendable gaming media number storage means 206 is displayed on the lendable gaming media number display unit 204.

When the number of lendable gaming media stored in the lendable gaming media number storage means 206 is "400", and the lending switch 202 is operated to lend "50" gaming media from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10 with one operation of the lending switch 202, after the lending notification is sent, "50" is added to the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a. Meanwhile, the number of lendable gaming media in the lendable gaming media number storage means 206 is updated from "400" to "350".

In addition, when the return switch 203 is operated, the number of gaming media stored in the lendable gaming media number memory means 206 of the lending unit 200 is stored in a gaming media number storage medium (magnetic card, IC card, IC coin, etc.), and the gaming media number storage medium is ejected from the lending unit 200.
In addition, in a situation where a number of game media exceeding "0" is stored in the game media number storage means 103a of the game media number control board 100 and no number of game media is stored in the lendable game media number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200, the game media number storage medium will not be discharged even if the return switch 203 is operated. In other words, even if the number of game media is stored in the game media number storage means 103a of the game media number control board 100, if the number of game media is not stored in the lendable game media number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200, the game media number storage medium will not be discharged even if the return switch 203 is operated.

Therefore, in the above case, by operating the counting switch 47, the number of gaming media stored in the number of gaming media storage means 103a is transmitted to the lending unit 200, and the number of gaming media is stored in the number of lendable gaming media storage means 206. Then, by operating the return switch 203, the number of gaming media stored in the number of lendable gaming media storage means 206 is stored in the gaming media number storage medium, and is discharged from the lending unit 200. When the number of gaming media stored in the number of lendable gaming media storage means 206 is stored in the gaming media number storage medium, the number of lendable gaming media stored in the number of lendable gaming media storage means 206 is updated to "0".

FIG. 30 is a diagram explaining the messages used for communication between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200.
As shown in FIG. 30, the types of messages are as follows:
The following messages are provided: 1. Gaming machine information notification 2. Counting notification 3. Loan notification 4. Loan receipt result response.
Of these messages, the gaming machine information notification, counting notification, and rental receipt result response are messages transmitted from the gaming machine 10 to the rental unit 200.
On the other hand, the rental notification is a message sent from the rental unit 200 to the gaming machine 10 .

Each message is composed of the following five pieces of data:
(1) Message length (2) Command (3) Serial number, counting number, or loan number (4) Data section (5) Checksum A data group consisting of the above five items is called a "message" and is transmitted in one transmission. In other words, it is not transmitted in parts.

(1) Message Length "Message length" refers to the length of the data consisting of five items: message length, command, serial number (serial number, counting serial number, or loan serial number), data section, and checksum, and is composed of 1 byte of data. For example, if the message length is 1 byte, the command is 1 byte, the serial number is 1 byte, the data section is 14 bytes, and the checksum is 1 byte, the message will be 18 bytes, and the message length will be the data corresponding to the 18 bytes (12h).

(2) Command A "command" is data for notifying the type of message among gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, and is composed of 1 byte of data.
For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the command for gaming machine information notification is set to "01h", the command for counting notification is set to "02h", the command for loan notification is set to "13h", and the command for loan receipt result response is set to "03h".
The receiver of the message can identify the type of message by determining the command value.

(3) Serial Number "Serial number" is data that refers to a number contained in a gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response. The serial number contained in a gaming machine information notification is called the "serial number," the serial number contained in a counting notification is called the "counting serial number," the serial number contained in a loan notification is called the "loan serial number," and the serial number contained in a loan receipt result response is called the "loan serial number." These various serial numbers are numbers in the range of "0" to "FFh" and consist of 1 byte of data.
When the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the serial number is controlled to notify "00h".
After the power is turned on, the serial number is updated (+1) every time a notification is sent.
The value following the serial number "FFh" is updated to "01h" (+1 twice) (it never becomes "0").

(4) Data Section The "data section" corresponds to data corresponding to the gaming machine information notification, the counting notification, the loan notification, and the loan receipt result response. The details of the data section of each message will be described later.
(5) Checksum A "checksum" is a value indicating the lowest byte of the total obtained by adding up five pieces of data: message length, command, serial number, data section, and checksum. Using this checksum, the receiving side can grasp data corruption during communication, and for example, the gaming machine 10 or the lending unit 200 can count the number of messages whose checksums do not match and check the communication malfunction status, etc. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the number of messages whose checksums do not match may be displayed on the image display device 23 or the like in a specified situation (during a setting confirmation mode in which the setting values can be confirmed or during a setting change mode in which the setting values can be changed).

Next, each of the data sections of the gaming machine information notification, the counting notification, the loan notification, and the loan receipt result response will be explained.
1. Data section of gaming machine information notification The data section of the gaming machine information notification is made up of gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, and gaming machine information, as shown in FIG.
a) Type of gaming machine "Type of gaming machine" is information for identifying the type of gaming machine 10. This information is data notifying, for example, the management medium, group classification, type of gaming machine, and the like.

b) Gaming machine information type "Gaming machine information type" is information for identifying whether the gaming machine information in the gaming machine information notification currently being notified is gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or hall control/fraud monitoring information. When notifying gaming machine performance information, "00h" is notified, when notifying gaming machine installation information, "01h" is notified, and when notifying hall control/fraud monitoring information, "02h" is notified.

c) Gaming Machine Information "Gaming Machine Information" is composed of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information. As the gaming machine information, any one of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted.
Here, the hall control/fraud monitoring information is generally transmitted every 300 ms (each time a gaming machine information notification is transmitted).
Furthermore, gaming machine installation information is transmitted every "60" seconds.
Furthermore, gaming machine performance information is generally transmitted every 180 seconds.
In the above, "as a rule" means that when the transmission timings of multiple gaming machine information overlap, the gaming machine information with the higher priority is transmitted. In other words, when the transmission timings of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information overlap, one of them is transmitted according to the priority. As shown in FIG. 30, the gaming machine installation information transmitted every "60" seconds has the first priority, and the gaming machine performance information transmitted every "180" seconds has the second priority.

Furthermore, the transmission period of the hole control/fraud monitoring information, 300 ms, may be within the range of 300 to 310 ms.
Similarly, the transmission period of the gaming machine installation information, "60" seconds, may be within the range of "60" to "62" seconds.
Similarly, the transmission period of the gaming machine performance information, 180 seconds, may be within the range of 180 to 186 seconds.
However, the above-mentioned range of the transmission cycle does not take a random value each time, but is a predetermined value.

FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining the specific configuration of the gaming machine information in the gaming machine information notification, which is gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information.
(a) Gaming machine performance information Gaming machine performance information consists of the following information on the total number of inserts, etc.
a) Total number of insertions The "total number of insertions" is the cumulative number of insertions of gaming media since the power was turned on. If a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, "0" may be output as the total number of insertions. For example, if the cumulative number of insertions of gaming media is "2000" in a cumulative total of "1000" games, the total number of insertions will be "2000", and "2000" may be output as the total number of insertions. If a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, "0" may be output as the total number of insertions. If a replay is won by the role drawing and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of bets for the next game of that game is not included in the total number of insertions.

b) Total number of awarded pieces The "total number of awarded pieces" is the number of game media that have been awarded since the power was turned on. If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of awarded pieces. For example, if the cumulative number of game media awarded is "2000" after a total of "1000" games, the total number of awarded pieces will be "2000," and "2000" may be output as the total number of awarded pieces. Furthermore, if a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of awarded pieces.
In addition, when gaming media equivalent to the bet number for a game are automatically bet based on the stopped display of a symbol combination corresponding to a replay, the automatically bet gaming media are not included in the "number awarded."

c) MY (difference)
"MY" is also called the "difference number" or "difference number of sheets."
"MY" is information on the maximum difference number that can be calculated from the number of game media given and the number of game media inserted since the power was turned on. When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, "0" may be output as MY. Specifically, the maximum difference number is the increase in the number of game media from the reference (the total number given minus the total number inserted) based on the reference value of the number of game media that was the smallest when the game result was obtained. For example, in a total of "1000" games, when the "100th" game has the smallest difference in the number of game media, and the number of game media at that time is "-200", and the "800th" game from that time has the largest difference in the number of game media, and the number of game media at that time is "+800", MY becomes "+1000", and "1000" may be output as MY. When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, "0" may be output as MY.

d) Total number of granted devices The "total number of granted devices" is the total number (cumulative number) of game media granted by the operation of the device (single bonus (SB), regular bonus (RB), and challenge bonus (CB)) since the power was turned on. If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of granted devices. For example, if the total number of game media obtained by the operation of the device is "100" after a cumulative total of "1000" games, the total number of granted devices will be "100", and "100" may be output as the total number of granted devices. If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of granted devices.

e) Total number of consecutive roles awarded The "total number of consecutive roles awarded" is the total number (cumulative number) of game media awarded by the operation of consecutive roles (first type special roles, also called regular bonus (RB)) since the power was turned on. If a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, "0" may be output as the total number of consecutive roles awarded. For example, if the total number of game media obtained by the operation of consecutive roles is "100" in a cumulative total of "1000" plays, the total number of consecutive roles awarded will be "100", and "100" may be output as the total number of consecutive roles awarded. If a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, "0" may be output as the total number of consecutive roles awarded.
In addition, the number of game media awarded by the operation of a first type special feature by a first type special feature continuous operation device (also referred to as "Type 1 BB") is also accumulated as the total number of continuous features awarded.

f) Role Ratio As described above, this is the role ratio (cumulative) value displayed by the role ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17,500), "FFh" is output as the role ratio (cumulative).
g) Continuous feature ratio As described above, this is the value of the continuous feature ratio (cumulative) displayed by the feature ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17,500), it is configured to output "FFh" as the continuous feature ratio (cumulative).

h) Favorable Zone Ratio As described above, this is the value of the favorable zone ratio (cumulative) displayed by the winning combination monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 175,000), the favorable zone ratio is configured to be output as "FFh." Also, even in gaming machines that do not have a favorable zone, the favorable zone ratio is configured to be output as "FFh."
i) Indication-Inclusive Role Ratio As described above, this is the value of the instruction-inclusive role ratio (cumulative) displayed by the role ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 175,000 times), the instruction-inclusive role ratio is configured to output "FFh." Also, even in gaming machines that do not have roles or instruction functions, "FFh" is configured to be output.

j) Gambler Status Ratio As described above, this is the value of the gimmick status ratio (cumulative) displayed by the gimmick ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 175,000), the gimmick status ratio is configured to output "FFh". Also, even in gaming machines that do not have gimmicks, the gimmick status ratio is configured to output "FFh".
k) Number of Plays "Number of Plays" is the cumulative number of games played since the gaming machine 10 was powered on. It is cleared ("0" is stored) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on.
l) Others Other types of information include information used in the rental unit 200, but the description thereof will be omitted in this embodiment.

(i) Gaming Machine Installation Information The gaming machine installation information is composed of the following information such as the main control chip ID number.
a) Main Control Chip ID Number The "main control chip ID number" is information including an individual chip number for identifying the main control chip which is an integrated unit of the CPU 55, RWM 53, and ROM 54 provided on the main control board 50, and is different information for each gaming machine 10 even if they are of the same model.
b) Main Control Chip Manufacturer Code "Main control chip manufacturer code" is information that indicates the gaming machine manufacturer stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.

c) Main Control Chip Product Code "Main control chip product code" is information indicating the model name of the gaming machine 10 stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.
The above-mentioned main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, and main control chip product code are configured to be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the gaming media number control board 100 during power-on processing when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. The main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, and main control chip product code are configured to be stored in the RWM 103 of the gaming media number control board 100, respectively.

d) Game Media Number Control Chip ID Number The "game media number control chip ID number" is information including an individual chip number for identifying the game media number control chip which is an integrated unit of the CPU 105, RWM 103, and ROM 104 provided on the game media number control board 100, and is different information for each game machine 10 even if they are of the same model.
In the case of a gaming machine that does not have the gaming media number control board 100 mounted thereon, it is possible to output "000000000000000000h" to the lending unit 200 as the gaming media number control chip ID number.

e) Game Media Number Control Chip Manufacturer Code "Game Media Number Control Chip Manufacturer Code" is information indicating the game machine manufacturer stored in the built-in memory (ROM 54) of the game media number control chip.
In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that does not have the gaming media number control board 100 mounted thereon, it is possible to output "000000h" to the lending unit 200 as the gaming media number control chip manufacturer code.
f) Game Media Number Control Chip Product Code "Game Media Number Control Chip Product Code" is information indicating the model name of the game machine 10 stored in the built-in memory (ROM 54) of the main control chip.
In the case of a gaming machine that does not have the gaming media number control board 100 mounted thereon, it is possible to output "0000000000000000h" as the gaming media number control chip product code to the lending unit.

(c) Hall control and fraud monitoring information Hall control and fraud monitoring information is composed of the following information on the number of gaming media, etc.
a) Number of gaming media The "number of gaming media" is information indicating the current number of gaming media (total number) stored in the gaming media number control board 100, and is subtracted by the insertion (betting) of gaming media and added by the awarding of gaming media based on the winning of a minor prize. The current number of gaming media is stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a and is displayed on the gaming media number display unit 121. For example, if "2000" is stored as the number of gaming media, "0007D0h" can be output to the lending unit 200 as the number of gaming media. The upper limit of the number of gaming media that can be stored in the gaming media number control board 100 is "16383 (D)".
In addition, by transmitting the current number of game media to the rental unit 200 (every "300" ms), it becomes possible for the rental unit 200 to manage the number of game media. This makes it possible to further strengthen security.

b) Number of Inserted Media The "number of inserted media" is information indicating the number of gaming media inserted (betted). For example, when the number of gaming media "3" is inserted (betted), "03h" can be output to the lending unit 200. Also, when the number of inserted media "3" is returned to the number of gaming media control board 100 by operating the settlement switch 46 before starting the game (before the start switch 41 is operated) from the situation where "3" has been inserted, "FDh" corresponding to "-3" can be output to the lending unit 200. In other words, information from "-3" (FDh) to +3 (03h) can be output to the lending unit 200.

c) Award Number The "award number" is information indicating the number of game media (dividend) awarded according to the state of the symbol combination that stops (wins) on the pay line after all reels 31 have stopped. For example, when the number of game media "8" is awarded, information "08h" can be output, and when the number of game media "15" is awarded, information "0Fh" can be output to the lending unit 200.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 transmits the above-mentioned "number of gaming media,""numberinserted," and "number awarded" to the lending unit 200, thereby enabling the lending unit 200 to detect abnormalities in the number of gaming media.

d) Primary Control State 1
"Main control state 1" is information indicating a state related to the gaming state. Specifically, each bit of the 1 byte of data is assigned a gaming state. For example, when the D0 bit is "1", it indicates the RB state, and when the D1 bit is "1", it indicates the BB state, and when the D2 bit is "1", it indicates the AT state. The gaming machine 10 is then capable of outputting this information to the lending unit 200.

Bits D3 to D6 correspond to gaming machine status signals 1 to 4. The usage of gaming machine status signals 1 to 4 can be changed or not used depending on the type of gaming machine 10. For example, gaming machine status signal 1 can be output each time the number of gaming media granted at AT reaches "100". Bit D7 is unused, and is configured to be able to output "0" regardless of the type of gaming machine 10. By configuring it in this way, for example, when reporting that the gaming machine is in the AT state, "00000100B" can be output to the lending unit 200.

e) Primary Control State 2
"Main control state 2" is information indicating a state related to the gaming state, similar to main control state 1. Bits D0 to D2 correspond to gaming machine state signals 5 to 7. The gaming state signals 5 to 7 can be changed in use or not used depending on the type of gaming machine 10. For example, when a specific RT state (a state in which replay probability varies (high probability)) is entered, the gaming state signal 5 can be output. Bits D3 to D7 are unused and configured to be able to output "0" regardless of the type of gaming machine 10. By configuring in this way, for example, when a specific RT state is entered, "00000001B" can be output to the lending unit 200.

f) Gaming Machine Error Status The “gaming machine error status” is information including an error code or the like that indicates an error that is occurring in the gaming machine 10 .
Specifically, the D0 to D5 bits indicate an error code. The D6 bit indicates whether there is an error in the game media count control board 100 (in this case, the D6 bit is "0") or an error in the main control board 50 (in this case, the D6 bit is "1"). The D7 bit indicates whether the lending unit 200 only notifies the error (in this case, the D7 bit is "0") or whether the lending unit 200 notifies the error and also notifies the hall computer 300 of the error code through the lending unit 200 (in this case, the D7 bit is "1").

For example, assume that the gaming machine 10 is capable of detecting a random number anomaly error and a radio wave anomaly error as types of errors. In this case, the error code is set to "00001B" for the random number anomaly error and "00010B" for the radio wave anomaly error, and information including these error codes can be output. Specifically, the random number anomaly error is an error of the main control board 50, and if the lending unit 200 only issues an error notification, "01000001B" can be output to the lending unit 200. Also, if the radio wave anomaly error is an error of the game media count control board 100, and if the lending unit 200 issues an error notification and also notifies the hall computer 300 of the error code, "10000010B" can be output to the lending unit 200. Note that if no error has occurred or if the gaming machine does not have an error code, "00000000B" can be output to the lending unit 200.

g) Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control)
"Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control)" is information on the detection of fraud related to the main control board 50 and the state related to the main control board 50. The gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) signal is treated as a signal for the hall computer 300. In other words, each signal of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) output from the gaming machine 10 is output to the hall computer 300 through the lending unit 200.

The signals that make up gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) are as follows.
First, a setting change signal is assigned to the D0 bit. When the D0 bit is "1", it indicates that the setting is being changed (in setting change mode) and that the setting has been changed. The setting change signal is "1" for the D0 bit from when the setting is being changed until one game ends after the setting is changed (for example, when all reels 31 have stopped and the process of awarding game media has ended). In any situation other than when the setting is being changed until one game ends after the setting is changed, the D0 bit is "0".
The D1 bit is assigned a setting confirmation signal. When the setting is being confirmed (in the setting confirmation mode), the D1 bit is set to "1", and when the setting is not being confirmed, the D1 bit is set to "0".

The D2 bit is assigned a cheating detection signal 1, the D3 bit is assigned a cheating detection signal 2, and the D4 bit is assigned a cheating detection signal 3. For example, in a gaming machine 10 in which random number abnormalities are regarded as cheating, if detection of a random number abnormality is assigned to cheating detection signal 1, the D2 bit will be "1" if a random number abnormality is detected, and the D2 bit will be "0" if a random number abnormality is not detected.
A security signal is assigned to the D5 bit. Specifically, the D5 bit is set to "1" when an illegal detection signal is being output, when a setting change signal is being output, or when a setting confirmation signal is being output, and is set to "0" in other circumstances.
Bits D6 and D7 are unused and are both set to "0".

h) Gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or control of the number of gaming media)
"Gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or gaming media number control)" is information indicating the detection of fraud relating to the main control board 50 or the gaming media number control board 100, or the state relating to the main control board 50 or the gaming media number control board 100. The gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or gaming media number control) signal is treated as a signal for the hall computer 300. In other words, each signal of gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or gaming media number control) output from the gaming machine 10 is output to the hall computer 300 via the lending unit 200.

The signals that constitute gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or gaming media number control) are as follows.
The D0 bit is assigned a setting door open signal. The "setting door open signal" is a signal that indicates whether the setting key switch cover that covers the setting key switch 12 for changing settings is open or not. When the setting key switch cover is open, the D0 bit is "1", and when the setting key switch cover is closed, the D0 bit is "0". Note that in gaming machines that do not have a setting key switch cover or a gaming machine that does not have a function for detecting the opening of the setting key switch cover, the D0 bit is "0".

The D1 bit is assigned a door open signal. The "door open signal" is information indicating whether the door (also called the "front door") of the gaming machine 10 is open or not. When the door of the gaming machine 10 is open, the D1 bit is "1", and when the door of the gaming machine 10 is closed, the D1 bit is "0".
The D2 bit is unused and is set to "0".
The D3 bit is assigned with detection of clearing the number of game media. The "detection of clearing the number of game media" refers to detection of the total game media number clear switch 112 provided on the game media number control board 100 being operated (the total game media number being cleared).
When operation of the total game media number clear switch 112 is detected, the D3 bit becomes "1", and when operation of the total game media number clear switch 112 is not detected, the D3 bit becomes "0". In the case of a gaming machine that does not have the total game media number clear switch 112, the D3 bit becomes "0".
Bits D4 to D7 are unused and are set to "0".

i) Gaming machine fraud 3 (main control or control of the number of gaming media)
“Gaming machine fraud 3” is provided as a reserve and indicates detection of fraud relating to the main control board 50 or the gaming media number control board 100, and status information relating to the main control board 50 or the gaming media number control board 100.
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, gaming machine fraud 3 (main control or gaming media number control) is unused, and bits D0 to D7 are "0".
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 31, other information is provided as hole control/fraud monitoring information, but a description thereof will be omitted in this embodiment.

Returning to the explanation given in FIG.
2. Data section of counting notification The data section of the counting notification is composed of the counted number of gaming media and the counted cumulative number of gaming media.
a) Number of counted game media The "number of counted game media" is the number of game media sent (returned) from the gaming machine 10 to the lending unit 200 based on the operation of the counting switch 47. The number of counted game media ranges from "0x00h" to "0x32h", and a maximum of "50 (D)" can be sent to the lending unit 200 in one counting notification. In addition, if the number of game media stored in the game media number control board 100 is "50" or more, data of "0x32h" indicating "50" is sent, but if the number of game media stored in the game media number control board 100 is less than "50", data according to the current number of game media stored in the game media number control board 100 is sent. For example, if the number of game media stored in the game media number control board 100 is "30 (D)", data of "0x1Eh" is sent.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned example of the number of counted gaming media is an example in which "50" is notified when the counting switch 47 is operated only once (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "short press operation"). However, it is also possible to notify "1" as the number of counted gaming media when a short press operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted, and to notify "50" as the number of counted gaming media when a long press operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted.
Here, "accepting a short press of the counting switch 47" refers to, for example, a period during which the level data relating to the operation acceptance of the counting switch 47 in the game media number control board 100 is a value indicating ON (the period during which the operation acceptance of the counting switch 47 is a value indicating ON in the interrupt process) is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than "1" second). In other words, if the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted within a time less than the predetermined period, it is determined that a short press of the counting switch 47 has been accepted, and the number of counted game media is set to "1".

If the counting switch 47 were to count the number of gaming media to "50" uniformly when operated once, the player would not be able to take out gaming media less than "50", for example, gaming media "1", at his will. Therefore, if it were possible to take out the smallest unit of gaming media, "1", by, for example, briefly pressing the counting switch 47, this would be in line with the purpose of the counting switch 47, which is to "have the ability to freely take out gaming media".

On the other hand, "a long press of the counting switch 47 has been accepted" refers to, for example, a period during which the level data relating to the operation acceptance of the counting switch 47 on the gaming media number control board 100 is a value indicating ON (the period during which the operation acceptance of the counting switch 47 is a value indicating ON in the interrupt process) that is longer than a predetermined period (for example, longer than "1" second). In other words, when the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted for a period of time that is longer than the predetermined period, it is deemed that a long press of the counting switch 47 has been accepted, and the number of counted gaming media is set to "50".

In addition, after the number of counted gaming media "50" is sent to the lending unit 200 in the counting notification, if the counting switch 47 is still being pressed and held at the timing of the next counting notification being sent, the number of counted gaming media "50" is sent to the lending unit 200 as a counting notification. In other words, once a long press is determined, the number of counted gaming media "50" continues to be sent to the lending unit 200 in the counting notification until the operation of the counting switch 47 is stopped (until the level data regarding the operation acceptance of the counting switch 47 becomes a value indicating off). In this case, counting will not be performed until it is determined that the counting switch 47 is being pressed and held (for example, for "1" second).

b) Counted cumulative number of gaming media The "counted cumulative number of gaming media" is the cumulative value of the counted number of gaming media since the gaming machine 10 is powered on. The counted cumulative number of gaming media ranges from "0x0000h" to "0xFFFFh", and the counted number of gaming media is added each time counting is performed. If the counted cumulative number of gaming media exceeds "0xFFFFh", the next value after "0xFFFFh" is set to "0x0000h". Furthermore, if the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the counted cumulative number of gaming media is cleared (set to "0").

3. Data section of the lending notification The "number of lending game media" which is the data section of the lending notification is the number of game media related to lending transmitted from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10 by operating the lending switch 202 of the lending unit 200. The number of lending game media ranges from "0x00h" to "0x32h", and a maximum of "50 (D)" can be transmitted to the gaming machine 10 in one lending notification. In addition, if the number of lendable game media stored on the lending unit 200 side is "50" or more, data of "0x32h" indicating "50" is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. In contrast, if the number of lendable game media stored on the lending unit 200 side is less than "50", data corresponding to the current number of lendable game media stored on the lending unit 200 side is transmitted. For example, if the number of lendable game media is "20", data of "0x14h" indicating "20" is transmitted.

4. Data section of the loan receipt result response The "number of loaned gaming media received result", which is the data section of the loan receipt result response, is data transmitted from the gaming machine 10 to the loan unit 200 based on the reception of data on the number of loaned gaming media transmitted from the loan unit 200 to the gaming machine 10. If the data received from the loan unit 200 is normal, it will be "0x00h", and if it is abnormal, it will be "0x01h".
Examples of abnormal cases include:
a) If the rental serial numbers notified from the rental unit 200 are not consecutive,
b) When the gaming machine 10 is in a state where it cannot be rented out due to an abnormality in the RWM 103 of the gaming media count control board 100,
c) The sum of the total number of game media stored in the game media count control board 100 and the number of loaned game media exceeds the upper limit of the number of game media stored in the game media count control board 100.
In addition, if the value becomes other than "0x00h" or "0x01h" due to other factors, the rental unit 200 will also determine that an abnormality has occurred.

Next, communication between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a time chart showing the basic communication sequence between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200.
The gaming machine 10 transmits a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit 200 every "300" ms from the time when the start-up of the gaming machine 10 is completed. In the example of Fig. 32, after transmitting the gaming machine information notification of serial number "n", after "300" ms has elapsed, the gaming machine information notification of serial number "n+1" is transmitted.
As shown in FIG. 30, among the gaming machine information in the gaming machine information notification, gaming machine performance information is transmitted every 180 seconds, gaming machine installation information is transmitted every 60 seconds, and hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted every 300 ms; more on this later.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 transmits a counting notification to the rental unit 200 "100" ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification.
In addition, the lending unit 200 transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine 10 within "170" ms after receiving the counting notification. Then, the gaming machine 10 transmits a lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200 within "10" ms after receiving the lending notification.
Since the gaming machine 10 transmits the next gaming machine information notification 300 ms after transmitting the previous gaming machine information notification, the time between transmitting the loan receipt result response and transmitting the next gaming machine information notification is 20 ms or more.

FIG. 33 is a time chart illustrating an example 1 of a start-up sequence of the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200, showing the case where the gaming machine 10 starts up first.
When the power supply to both the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 is off (synonymous with "power off"; same below), the VL signal and PSI signal between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 are off.
The VL signal is a signal that is turned on when the gaming machine 10 is playable (gaming media can be bet), and is a signal that is kept off until the lending unit 200 is started up.
In addition, the PSI signal is a connection signal between the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200, and is a signal that is off until the lending unit 200 is started up.

After the power is turned on, when the start-up of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the start-up of the lending unit 200 is not yet completed.
In this situation, the gaming machine 10 transmits the first message, i.e., a gaming machine information notification, to the rental unit 200 in accordance with the message notification program, and then transmits a counting notification 100 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification, as described above. However, since the rental unit 200 has not yet completed starting up when the gaming machine information notification and counting notification are transmitted, the rental unit 200 is unable to receive these gaming machine information notification and counting notification. In the figure, the "?" mark indicates that although the gaming machine 10 has transmitted the gaming machine information notification and counting notification, the rental unit 200 is unable to receive these notifications.
Furthermore, since the lending unit 200 has not yet started and has not yet received the counting notification, the lending unit 200 does not transmit a lending notification to the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 does not transmit a lending receipt result response.

After the gaming machine 10 has completed booting, the serial number of the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number of the counting notification that are sent first are "0x00h". In addition, since the serial number and counting serial number are updated regardless of whether the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 are connected or not, at the next transmission timing (the timing of transmission "300" ms after the gaming machine 10 has completed booting and the first gaming machine information notification sent), "0x01h" is sent as the serial number and counting serial number.

Thereafter, when the startup of the lending unit 200 is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal are turned on, and the operation of the bet switch 40 and the counting switch 47 of the gaming machine 10 are enabled. The lending unit 200 is also able to receive information transmitted from the gaming machine 10. After startup, the lending unit 200 is able to transmit a lending notification to the gaming machine 10 based on the reception of the counting notification. The example of Figure 33 shows an example in which the gaming machine 10 transmits a counting notification of counting serial number "m" to the lending unit 200, and when the lending unit 200 receives the notification, it transmits a lending notification of lending serial number "k" to the gaming machine 10.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 becomes able to transmit a rental receipt result response to the rental unit 200 based on the received rental notification. The example of Fig. 33 shows an example in which the gaming machine 10 transmits a rental receipt result response of the rental serial number "k" to the rental unit 200 based on receiving a rental notification of the rental serial number "k".

As described above, the gaming machine 10 transmits gaming machine information notifications and counting notifications regardless of whether the rental unit 200 is activated or not, so the rental unit 200 manages the serial number of the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number of the counting notification transmitted from the gaming machine 10 after the rental unit 200 has completed its activation. By configuring in this manner, the gaming machine 10 can transmit messages without determining the status of the rental unit 200, so the program capacity for determining the status of the rental unit 200 can be reduced.

FIG. 34 is a time chart illustrating an example 2 of the startup sequence of the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200, showing the case where the lending unit 200 starts up first.
When the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off and only the power supply of the lending unit 200 is turned on, only the lending unit 200 starts to start up. During the startup of the lending unit 200, the VL signal and the PSI signal are off.
Then, when the startup of the lending unit 200 is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal of the lending unit 200 are turned on.

FIG. 34 shows an example in which the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on after the VL signal and the PSI signal of the lending unit 200 are turned on.
Then, when the start-up of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal of both the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200 are turned on, and the operation of the bet switch 40 and the counting switch 47 of the gaming machine 10 become valid.

33, the gaming machine 10 transmits the first message, i.e., a gaming machine information notification, to the rental unit 200 according to the program for the message notification, and further transmits a counting notification "100" ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification. Since the startup of the rental unit 200 is completed at this point, the rental unit 200 can receive the first gaming machine information notification and the counting notification.
When the lending unit 200 receives the counting notification, it transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine 10 within "170" ms. Furthermore, when the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notification, it transmits a lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200 within "10" ms.
In this manner, if the startup of the rental unit 200 has already been completed when the startup of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the rental unit 200 can receive from the first message (gaming machine information notification with serial number "0") sent from the gaming machine 10.

FIG. 35 is a time chart illustrating the basic sequence of notifying gaming machine information.
In FIG. 35, after the start-up of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the first gaming machine information notification is referred to as "A0", and subsequent gaming machine information notifications are referred to as "A1", "A2", . . .
Similarly, the counting notifications are referred to as "B0", "B1", "B2", ..., the loan notifications are referred to as "C0", "C1", "C2", ..., and the loan receipt result responses are referred to as "D0", "D1", "D2", ....
As shown in FIG. 32, the gaming machine 10 transmits a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit 200 every "300" ms.
Here, as shown in FIG.
(1) Gaming machine performance information: every 180 seconds (second priority)
(2) Gaming machine installation information: every 60 seconds (first priority)
(3) Hall control/fraud monitoring information: A gaming machine information notification including information on any one of the gaming machines is transmitted every 300 ms.

In principle, hall control and fraud monitoring information is transmitted every 300 ms, but if the transmission cycle overlaps with the transmission cycle of gaming machine installation information, which is transmitted every 60 seconds, but does not overlap with the transmission cycle of gaming machine performance information, which is transmitted every 180 seconds, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted first at that transmission timing, and the hall control and fraud monitoring information is transmitted at the next transmission timing after the transmission of the gaming machine installation information (300 ms later).
In FIG. 35, after the gaming machine 10 is started, the 200th gaming machine information notification (A199 in the figure) is transmitted 60 seconds after the first gaming machine information notification was transmitted (300 ms x 200 = 60,000 ms).
Therefore, at the timing of transmitting the gaming machine information notification "A199", the gaming machine information notification including the gaming machine installation information is transmitted in priority over the hall control and fraud monitoring information. Then, at the timing of transmitting the gaming machine information notification "A200" 300 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification "A199", the gaming machine information notification including the hall control and fraud monitoring information is transmitted.

Furthermore, if the transmission period of the gaming machine installation information overlaps with a 60-second cycle and also overlaps with a 180-second cycle of the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted as the first priority, and in the next transmission period (300 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine installation information), the gaming machine performance information is transmitted as the second priority. Furthermore, in the next transmission period (300 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine performance information), the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted.
35, the timing of transmission of the gaming machine information notification of "A599" is when "60" seconds have elapsed and when "180" seconds have elapsed from the time of transmission of the first gaming machine information notification (300 ms x 600 = 180,000 ms). Note that the time when "180" seconds have elapsed always corresponds to the time when "60" seconds have elapsed.

Therefore, when the gaming machine information notification "A599" is sent, the gaming machine installation information is sent as the first priority. Furthermore, when the gaming machine information notification "A600" is sent 300 ms after that time, the gaming machine performance information is sent as the second priority. Furthermore, when the gaming machine information notification "A601" is sent 300 ms after that time, the hall control and fraud monitoring information is sent.

When sending a gaming machine information notification, gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information) is obtained (read from RWM, ROM, etc.), stored in a transmission register, and transmitted from a specified output port.
Therefore, the latest information immediately prior to transmission is transmitted for hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information.
Among the gaming machine information notifications, the gaming machine installation information is the main control chip ID number, etc., and is therefore fixed information, not information that changes over time (as the game progresses).
On the other hand, the hall control/fraud monitoring information includes the number of game media, the number of inserted game media, the number of awarded game media, etc., as shown in FIG. 31, and is therefore information that changes as the game progresses (time passes).

When the transmission cycles of gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information all overlap, the information is transmitted in the following order of priority: gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information. Therefore, the transmission of hall control/fraud monitoring information is delayed by up to 600 ms from the time the transmission cycle of the gaming machine information notification (300 ms) arrives.

In this case, if the hall control and fraud monitoring information is obtained at the time when the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, and the hall control and fraud monitoring information is transmitted 600 ms after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted (after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted and after the gaming machine performance information is transmitted), the hall control and fraud monitoring information from 600 ms ago will be transmitted.
Therefore, when the hole control/fraud monitoring information is to be transmitted, the hole control/fraud monitoring information is acquired and stored in a transmission register immediately before the actual transmission.

The above also applies when the transmission cycles of the gaming machine installation information and the hall control/fraud monitoring information overlap. In this case, the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted 300 ms after the transmission cycle (300 ms) of the gaming machine information notification has arrived.
Here, if the hall control/fraud monitoring information is obtained at the time when the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, and the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted 300 ms after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, the hall control/fraud monitoring information from 300 ms ago will be transmitted.
Therefore, when the hole control/fraud monitoring information is to be transmitted, the hole control/fraud monitoring information is acquired and stored in a transmission register immediately before the actual transmission.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31, the gaming machine performance information includes the total number of coins inserted, the total number of coins awarded, MY, etc., and therefore changes as the game progresses (time passes).
When the transmission periods for the gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information overlap, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted in priority over the gaming machine performance information, and the gaming machine performance information is transmitted 300 ms after the transmission period for the gaming machine information notification (300 ms) arrives.
In this case, if gaming machine performance information is obtained at the time when the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, and the gaming machine performance information is transmitted 300 ms after the timing of transmitting the gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information from 300 ms ago will be transmitted.
Therefore, when transmitting the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine performance information is obtained immediately before the actual transmission and stored in a transmission register.
In other words, at the timing of transmitting the gaming machine information notification every 300 ms, only the gaming machine information (either hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, or gaming machine performance information) of the gaming machine information notification to be transmitted in this interrupt processing is stored in the transmission register.

FIG. 36 is a time chart illustrating the counting notification sequence.
When the player ends the game, etc., the counting switch 47 is operated, and a process is executed to transmit (return, return) the gaming medium on the gaming machine 10 side to the rental unit 200.
In addition, the counting process does not actually transmit or transfer the gaming media data from the gaming machine 10 to the lending unit 200, but rather performs a subtraction process of the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a of the gaming machine 10, and performs an addition process of the number of gaming media stored in the lendable gaming media number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200.
In the example of Figure 36, the situation before accepting the operation of the counting switch 47 is that the (total) number of game media stored in the game media number control board 100 (game media number storage means 103a) is "200", and the number of game media available for lending stored in the lending unit 200 is "20".

When the startup of the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 is complete and communication between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 is possible, the serial number of the gaming machine information notification is "n" at the timing when the first gaming machine information notification is sent to the rental unit 200 after the operation (ON) of the counting switch 47 is detected. Also, since the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number control board 100 at this point is "200", the number of gaming media "200" is sent to the rental unit 200.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 updates the counting notification to the rental unit 200. The counting serial number of the counting notification at this time is assumed to be "m". Also, the number of counted gaming media in the counting notification at this time is assumed to be "50". In this example, when the operation of the counting switch 47 is detected, the number of counted gaming media "50" is transmitted in one counting notification transmission.

Also, if the counting process is the first counting process since the start-up of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the gaming machine 10 transmits the counted cumulative number of gaming media "50" as a counting notification. Note that the gaming machine 10 subtracts the number of counted gaming media from the number of gaming media before executing the process of transmitting the counting notification. Therefore, the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number control board 100 is updated from "200" to "150" before executing the process of transmitting the counting notification. Furthermore, when the lending unit 200 receives the counting notification, it adds the counted gaming media to the number of lendable gaming media stored in the lendable gaming media number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 36, the number of lendable gaming media is updated from "20" to "70".
Next, the lending unit 200 transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine 10. The lending serial number of this lending notification is assumed to be "k". Also, the number of lending gaming media in this lending notification is "0". Here, the reason why the number of lending gaming media "0" is transmitted is because the lending switch 202 has not been operated.

In addition, when the gaming machine 10 receives a rental notice from the rental unit 200, it checks the consistency between the information indicated in the rental notice and the information indicated in the previous rental notice.
Then, if the gaming machine 10 checks the consistency between the information indicated in the loan notification and the information indicated in the previous loan notification and determines that the information is normal, it sends a loan receipt result response to the loan unit 200 indicating the loan serial number as "k" and the loan point receipt result as "normal."

When transmitting the next gaming machine information notification with the serial number "n+1", the serial number "n+1" and the number of gaming media "150" are transmitted.
36 shows an example in which the counting switch 47 remains on (the counting switch 47 is pressed and held down) even when "300" ms has elapsed since the gaming machine information notification with serial number "n" was sent and the next gaming machine information notification with serial number "n+1" is sent. Therefore, the counting notification transmitted is the counting serial number "m+1", the number of counted gaming media "50", and the cumulative number of counted gaming media "100". As a result, the number of lendable gaming media on the lending unit 200 side is updated to "120".
Furthermore, the lending unit 200 transmits a lending serial number "k+1" and the number of lending gaming media "0" to the gaming machine 10 as a lending notification to the gaming machine 10. Furthermore, upon receiving the lending notification, the gaming machine 10 transmits to the lending unit 200 a lending serial number "k+1" and a lending point receipt result of "normal" as a lending receipt result response.

In this way, when gaming media are stored in the gaming machine 10, from when the counting switch 47 is detected to be on until it is detected to be off (while the counting switch 47 is pressed and held), the gaming machine 10 continues to send a counting notification including a predetermined number of counted gaming media to the lending unit 200 every "300" ms. By configuring in this way, a fixed amount ("50" in this example) of counted gaming media can be sent to the lending unit 200 every "300" ms without requiring complicated operations (just a long press), thereby reducing the burden of the counting operation.
Since the counting switch 47 is connected to the game media number control board 100, the input port 101 is checked for each interrupt process of the game media number control board 100, and if information indicating ON has been input to the input port 101 indicating the counting switch 47, the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted. If information indicating OFF has subsequently been input to the input port 101 indicating the counting switch 47, acceptance of the operation of the counting switch 47 is terminated.

The example of Figure 36 shows an example in which the counting switch 47 is detected as being off after a gaming machine information notification with serial number "n+1" is transmitted and before a gaming machine information notification with serial number "n+2" is transmitted.
In this case, when transmitting a gaming machine information notification with the serial number "n+2", the gaming machine 10 transmits the number of gaming media "100".
Also, as a counting notification, the counting serial number "m+2", the number of counted gaming media "0", and the cumulative number of counted gaming media "100" are transmitted. Furthermore, as a lending notification from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10, the lending serial number "k+2" and the number of lending gaming media "0" are transmitted to the gaming machine 10. Furthermore, as a lending receipt result response from the gaming machine 10 to the lending unit 200, the lending serial number "k+2" and the lending point receipt result "normal" are transmitted.

The counting notification is transmitted 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted. In other words, the counting notification is transmitted every 300 ms. Therefore, even when the counting switch 47 is not operated, a counting notification in which the number of counted gaming media is "0" is transmitted every 300 ms.
In addition, in a situation where no gaming media is stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a of the gaming machine 10, even if the counting switch 47 is operated, a counting notification indicating that the number of counted gaming media is "0" is transmitted every "300" ms.

Next, the counting process will be described with reference to a flowchart.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the counting process in the second embodiment.
Although not shown in FIG. 29, the RWM 103 of the game media count control board 100 has the following memory areas.
The counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) is a storage area that stores data indicating whether or not counting is in progress.
The count value storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) is a storage area for storing the count value (number of counted game media) to be transmitted at the time of count notification.
The count accumulation value memory area (_CT_CAL_ALL) is a memory area that stores the count accumulation value (count accumulation number of gaming media).
The counting serial number storage area (_NB_CAL_NUM) is a storage area that stores the counting serial number.
In the case of a gaming machine that does not have the gaming media count control board 100, the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 may be provided with each of the above memory areas.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not it is the count notification timing. Here, the "count notification timing" refers to a timing when "100" ms has elapsed since the gaming machine information notification was transmitted. Note that "100" ms after the elapse of time may be within the range of "90" ms to "100" ms.
If it is determined that it is the counting notification timing, the process proceeds to step S702, and if it is determined that it is not the counting notification timing, the process according to this flowchart ends.

When it is determined that it is the timing for count notification and the process proceeds to step S702, the game media count control board 100 clears the counting flag (sets it to "0"). Next, the process proceeds to step S703, where it is determined whether or not to execute counting. Here, it is determined whether or not the counting switch 47 has been operated.
When the counting switch 47 is operated, a counting switch signal is turned on and input to the input port 101 of the game media number control board 100. When the counting switch signal is turned on and input to the input port 101, information indicating that the counting switch signal has been turned on and input (the counting switch 47 has been operated) ("1" if operated, and "0" if not operated) is stored in a predetermined storage area in the RWM 103 of the game media number control board 100. The signal input to the input port 101 is stored in the RWM 103 by a timer interrupt process every 1 ms.
If it is determined in step S703 that the counting switch 47 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S704, and if it is determined that the counting switch 47 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S712.

In step S704, it is determined whether the (total) number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a of the game media number control board 100 is "0." If it is determined that the number of game media is not "0," the process proceeds to step S705, and if it is determined that the number is "0," the process proceeds to step S712.
In this way, it is first determined whether or not the counting switch 47 has been operated, and if the counting switch 47 has not been operated, the counting process is not started, and if the counting switch 47 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the (total) number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is "0." Then, if the (total) number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is "0," the counting process is not started, and if the (total) number of game media is not "0," the counting process is started.
As a result, when comparing a situation in which the counting switch 47 is operated with a situation in which the (total) number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is "0", the number of situations in which the counting switch 47 is operated is relatively low, so by first determining whether or not the counting switch 47 is operated, it is possible to reduce the processing burden in the counting process.

In step S705, the count value (number of counted game media) is set to "50".
Next, the process proceeds to step S706, where an arithmetic process (subtraction process) is executed to compare the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a with the count value "50." If it is determined that the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is equal to or greater than the count value as a result of this arithmetic process, the process proceeds to step S708, and if it is determined that the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is less than the count value, the process proceeds to step S707.
In step S707, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is obtained.
In the next step S708, the count value is stored. In this process, when the answer is "Yes" in step S706 (when the number of game media is determined to be equal to or greater than the count value), the count value "50" set in step S705 is stored in the count value storage area. On the other hand, when the answer is "No" in step S706 (when the number of game media is less than the count value), the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a obtained in step S707 is stored as a count value in the count value storage area.

In the next step S709, the (total) number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is updated. This process is a process of subtracting the count value stored in the count value storage area from the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a. Therefore, when it is determined that the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is "50" or more and "50" is stored in the count value storage area, "50" is subtracted from the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a to update the number of game media. On the other hand, when the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is less than "50" and the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is stored in the count value storage area, the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is updated to "0".
Next, the process proceeds to step S710, where the count value stored in the count value storage area is added to the count cumulative value storage area to update the value stored in the count cumulative value storage area.
Next, the process proceeds to step S711, where, since it has been decided that counting will be performed, the counting flag is set ("FFh" is stored).

Then, the process proceeds to step S712 to output the count notification. Specifically, "0x07h" is output as the message length, "0x02h" is output as the command, the count serial number stored in the count serial number storage area is output as the count serial number, the count value stored in the count value storage area is output as the count value, the count cumulative value stored in the count cumulative value storage area is output as the count cumulative value, and the checksum value (1 byte) of the various output data is output.
Then, the process proceeds to step S713, where the count value stored in the count value storage area is cleared. Note that the value stored in the count cumulative value storage area is not cleared when the count notification is output (is output).

Next, proceed to step S714 and execute the process of updating the counting serial number (process of changing to "+1"). Note that when the counting serial number is "255(D)", the result of adding "+1" is "0", so if it becomes "0", the process of updating the counting serial number (process of adding "+1") is executed again. In other words, when the counting serial number is "255", the process of updating the counting serial number is executed twice to update the counting serial number to "1". Also, when the counting serial number is a value less than "255" (for example, "10"), the result of executing the process of updating the counting serial number (process of adding "+1") does not become "0", so the process of updating the counting serial number is executed only once. In the above example, the counting serial number is updated to "11".

In addition, information based on the counting flag is sent to the main control board 50. This allows the main control board 50 to determine that counting is in progress. In addition, for example, by sending information indicating that counting is in progress from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 can perform a performance that corresponds to the time when counting is in progress.

In this embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is possible even during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated under a situation where gaming media can be bet, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but when the counting switch 47 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible not to execute the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47. The reason for this configuration is that when the counting switch 47 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is highly likely that a hall staff member is counting (and not a player).

On the other hand, if the counting switch 47 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a dedicated screen for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be displayed on the image display device 23, or a sound may be output. In this way, the necessary information can be provided to the hall staff. Furthermore, while displaying a dedicated screen for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, "Counting in progress" may be displayed on the screen) may be given. The notification in this case is configured to be different from the presentation (for the player) during counting described above. Such a notification can be used to draw attention.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when an error occurs (which may be a predetermined (predetermined) portion of the errors, or may be all errors), counting based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is possible.
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated under a situation where gaming media can be bet, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but when the counting switch 47 is operated during an error, it is possible not to execute an effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47. The reason for this configuration is that when the counting switch 47 is operated during an error, there is a risk that fraudulent activity is being performed.
Errors include unrecoverable errors (for example, errors that require resetting of settings (including turning the power on and off), such as RWM abnormal errors and random number update errors) and recoverable errors (for example, a front door open error), but it is also possible to provide situations in which counting processing is impossible and situations in which it is possible, depending on the type of error. For example, counting processing can be made impossible when an unrecoverable error occurs, and made possible when a recoverable error occurs.

On the other hand, if the counting switch 47 is operated during an error, a dedicated screen for when there is an error may be displayed on the image display device 23, or a sound may be output. In this way, the necessary information can be provided to the hall staff. Furthermore, while displaying the dedicated screen for when there is an error, a notification may be given indicating that counting is in progress (for example, "Counting in progress" may be displayed on the screen). The notification in this case is configured to be different from the presentation during counting (for the player) described above. Such a notification can be used to draw attention. Note that at this time, it may be configured such that the number of bets cannot be returned by the settlement switch 46.

In addition, in this embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is possible even during a game (for example, while the reel 31 is spinning).
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated under a situation where gaming media can be bet, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but when the counting switch 47 is operated during a game, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that when the counting switch 47 is operated during a game, there is a risk that fraudulent activity is being performed.

FIG. 38 is a time chart illustrating the lending notification sequence between the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200.
38, the situation before the on of the lending switch 202 is detected (before the operation of the lending switch 202 is accepted) is that the number of game media "10" is stored in the game media number storage means 103a of the game media number control board 100, and the number of lendable game media "120" is stored in the lendable game media number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200. Note that since the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a of the game media number control board 100 is less than "50", when the counting switch 47 is operated, "10" is counted.

This shows an example in which the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 have completed startup and are able to communicate with each other, and after detecting that the rental switch 202 of the rental unit 200 has been turned on (after accepting an operation), the gaming machine 10 sends a gaming machine information notification with serial number "n" and number of gaming media "10".
Next, the counting serial number "m" and the number of counted gaming media "0" are transmitted as a counting notification. After receiving this counting notification, the lending serial number "k" and the number of lending gaming media "50" are transmitted as a lending notification. After transmitting the number of lending gaming media "50", the lending unit 200 updates the number of lendable gaming media to "120-50=70". Note that the timing at which the lending unit 200 updates the number of lendable gaming media may be the timing at which it receives a lending receipt result response.

When the gaming machine 10 receives a loan notification, it checks the consistency between the information indicated in the loan notification and the information indicated in the previous loan notification, and if the check result is normal (assuming that it is normal in this example), it sends the loan serial number "k" and the loan point receipt result "normal" to the loan unit 200 as a loan receipt result response.
Next, the gaming machine 10 updates the number of gaming media to "10+50=60" during the period from when it receives the rental notification to when it transmits the rental receipt result response.
When the gaming machine 10 next transmits a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit 200, it transmits the serial number "n+1" and the number of gaming media "60" as the gaming machine information notification to the rental unit 200. Furthermore, it transmits the counting serial number "m+1", the number of counted gaming media "0", and the cumulative number of counted gaming media "0" as the counting notification.

At this point, if the on state of the rental switch 202 of the rental unit 200 is continuously detected, the rental unit 200 transmits the rental serial number "k+1" and the number of rental gaming media "50" to the gaming machine 10 as a rental notification to the gaming machine 10 (in the figure, "*1"). The number of rental available gaming media is then updated to "70-50=20". Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 transmits the rental serial number "k+1" and the rental point receipt result "normal" (assuming the check result was normal) as a rental receipt result response to the rental unit 200. The gaming machine 10 also updates the number of gaming media to "60+50=110" between receiving the rental notification and transmitting the rental receipt result response.
On the other hand, if the lending switch 202 is detected as off at the timing when the lending unit 200 transmits a lending notification of lending serial number "k+1" to the gaming machine 10, a lending notification of the number of lendable gaming media "0" is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 (in the figure, "*2"). In this case, the number of lendable gaming media remains "70". Also, the number of gaming media in the gaming machine 10 remains "60".

The lending unit 200 may determine whether the level data of the lending switch 202 is on/off each time a lending notification is sent (i.e., every "300" ms) as a method of detecting that the lending switch 202 has changed from off to on. In contrast, in this embodiment, the on/off rising data of the lending switch 202 is determined each time a lending notification is sent. Therefore, in this case, even if the lending switch 202 is continuously on, the lending operation is accepted only at the timing when it is first operated, so even if the lending switch 202 is continuously on, the number of lending media is transmitted as "0" at the timing of transmitting the second or subsequent lending notifications. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 38, even if the on of the lending switch 202 is continuously detected at the timing when the lending notification of the lending serial number "k+1" is transmitted, a lending notification with the number of lending media "0" is transmitted to the gaming machine 10.

Furthermore, when the number of counted game media is "1" or more in the counting notification sent from the gaming machine 10 when the on of the lending switch 202 is detected (i.e., when both the lending switch 202 and the counting switch 47 are operated), the lending unit 200 sets the number of lending game media in the lending notification sent immediately after the counting notification to "0." The lending switch 202 accepted at this time may be invalidated, or the lending unit 200 may store an operation acceptance flag for the lending switch 202 and send the number of lending game media as "50" in the lending notification sent after the number of counted game media in the counting notification becomes "0."
Furthermore, when the lending unit 200 stores an operation acceptance flag for the lending switch 202, if the lending switch 202 is operated again while a flag regarding the operation acceptance of the lending switch 202 is stored, the flag may be rewritten to a flag indicating that the lending switch 202 has been operated twice, or the second and subsequent operations may be invalidated.

In addition, when the lending unit 200 transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine 10 and the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notification, all information of the lending notification is stored in a lending notification information storage area provided in the RWM 103 of the gaming media count control board 100. This allows the gaming machine 10 to determine whether the information of the lending point receipt result is "normal" or "abnormal" when transmitting a lending receipt result response.
Specifically, "k" is stored as the lending serial number in the lending notification information storage area, and when the lending serial number of the lending notification sent from the lending unit 200 is "k+1", the stored "k" is incremented to generate "k+1" and compared with the received lending serial number "k+1". In this case, since the generated lending serial number and the received lending serial number match, the received lending serial number "k+1" is stored in the lending notification information storage area.

In addition, if "k" is stored as the loan serial number in the loan notification information storage area, and the loan serial number in the loan notification sent from the loan unit 200 is "k+2", the stored "k" is incremented to generate "k+1" and compared with the received loan serial number "k+2". In this case, since the generated loan serial number does not match the received loan serial number, the received loan serial number "k+2" is not stored (the loan serial number in the loan notification information storage area remains "k").
Furthermore, since the upper limit of the rental serial number is "255", if the rental serial number is incremented when it is "255", the rental serial number becomes "0". However, since the rental serial number "0" can only be transmitted to the gaming machine 10 immediately after the rental unit 200 is started, the rental serial number is incremented again to become "1". In other words, when updating the rental serial number when it is "255", the next rental serial number is made "1" by incrementing it twice.

In the above example, the method of comparing the rental serial number stored in the gaming machine 10 with the rental serial number of the received rental notification is to increment the rental serial number stored in the gaming machine 10 and then determine whether it matches the rental serial number received from the rental unit 200. However, this is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to decrement the rental serial number received from the rental unit 200 and then compare whether it matches the rental serial number stored in the gaming machine 10.
Alternatively, the rental serial number stored in the gaming machine 10 may be subtracted from the rental serial number received from the rental unit 200, and the determination may be made based on whether the result is "1".

Next, a timer for transmitting a gaming machine information notification (hereinafter, referred to as a "gaming machine information notification timer") will be described.
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a gaming machine information notification timer and a gaming machine information notification request flag.
The gaming machine information notification timer includes a gaming machine information notification timer A (_TM_INF_CTL_A), a gaming machine information notification timer B (_TM_INF_CTL_B), and a gaming machine information notification timer C (_TM_INF_CTL_C).
Gaming machine information notification timer A is a timer for determining the timing for transmitting hall control and fraud monitoring information every 300 ms.
The gaming machine information notification timer B is a timer for determining the timing for transmitting the gaming machine installation information every "60" seconds.
The gaming machine information notification timer C is a timer for determining the timing for transmitting the gaming machine performance information every "180" seconds.

The RWM 103 of the game media count control board 100 is provided with memory areas for game machine information notification timers A to C, and each memory area stores a timer value.
The memory area of the gaming machine information notification timer A is 2 bytes, and the memory area of the gaming machine information notification timers B and C is 1 byte.
Each storage area of the gaming machine information notification timers A to C is initialized (cleared and stores "0") when the power is turned on.
As described above, the blinking switching period of the role ratio monitor 113 is "300" ms, and the RWM 103 is provided with a "blinking switching time (_TM_CHG_FLS)" as a timer area for managing the blinking switching time, and further, the RWM 103 is provided with a "blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS)" as a flag for determining whether the light is on or off.
On the other hand, although the gaming machine information notification timer A measures "300" ms, which is the same as the blinking switching period, it has a timer area separate from the blinking switching time.

In the following explanation, the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer A, the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer B, and the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer C will be abbreviated as gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, and gaming machine information notification timer C, respectively.
Furthermore, the value stored in the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer A, the value stored in the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer B, and the value stored in the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer C will be abbreviated as the value of gaming machine information notification timer A, the value of gaming machine information notification timer B, and the value of gaming machine information notification timer C, respectively.

In the second embodiment, the CPU 105 of the game media count control board 100 executes a timer interrupt process every "1" ms. Then, every time this timer interrupt is executed (every "1" ms), the value of the game machine information notification timer A is updated.
The gaming machine information notification timer A is a decrement timer, and as described above, when the power is turned on, the value stored therein is "0." The value of the gaming machine information notification timer A cycles within the range of "0" to "300 (D)."
Therefore, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "0" when the power is turned on, and is updated to "300" when the first timer interrupt is executed, and is further updated to "299" when the next timer interrupt is executed.
Furthermore, when the value before the update is "0", such as when the power is turned on, if "1" is subtracted during interrupt processing, the value is updated to "300", and if "1" is subtracted during the next interrupt processing, the value is updated to "299".
In contrast, in an interrupt process in which the pre-update value is "1", when "1" is subtracted the result becomes "0", but in this case "300" is immediately stored in the interrupt process.
therefore,
"0" → "300" → "299" → ... → "2" → "1" → ("0" →) "300" → "299" → ...
It will be updated as follows.

The gaming machine information notification timer B is an increment timer, and as described above, when the power is turned on, the value "0" is stored. The value of the gaming machine information notification timer B cycles within the range of "0" to "199 (D)".
therefore,
"0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "198" → "199" → "0" → "1" → ...
It will be updated as follows.
The value of gaming machine information notification timer B is incremented by "1" when the value of gaming machine information notification timer A becomes "300". However, when the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is initialized at power-on and stores "0", when the value of gaming machine information notification timer A becomes "300" in the first timer interrupt process, the value of gaming machine information notification timer B is not updated and remains at "0". This control will be described later.

The gaming machine information notification timer C is an increment timer, and as described above, when the power is turned on, the value "0" is stored. The value of the gaming machine information notification timer C cycles within the range of "0" to "2(D)."
therefore,
"0" → "1" → "2" → "0" → "1" →...
It will be updated as follows.
The value of gaming machine information notification timer C is incremented by "1" when the value of gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "0." However, when the value of gaming machine information notification timer B is initialized to "0" when the power is turned on, the value of gaming machine information notification timer C also remains at the initialized "0" and is not updated to "1" at this point.

The gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is a flag indicating whether it is the timing to notify gaming machine performance information (every 180 seconds) or not, and whether it is the timing to notify gaming machine installation information (every 60 seconds) or not, and is provided as a 1-byte memory area in RWM 103 of the gaming media number control board 100.
The gaming machine information notification request flag is set to an initial value (all bits "0") by an initialization process performed when the power is turned on.
The gaming machine information notification request flag includes a gaming machine performance information notification request flag and a gaming machine installation information notification request flag.

The gaming machine performance information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the period (timing) for transmitting gaming machine performance information from the gaming machine information notification arrives, and uses the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag. When the "D0" bit is "1", it indicates that the period for transmitting gaming machine performance information has arrived, and when it is "0", it indicates that the period for transmitting gaming machine performance information has not arrived. In addition, when a gaming machine performance information notification is transmitted, it is updated from "1" to "0".
The gaming machine installation information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the period (timing) for transmitting gaming machine installation information from the gaming machine information notification arrives, and uses the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag. When the "D0" bit is "1", it indicates that the period for transmitting gaming machine installation information has arrived, and when it is "0", it indicates that the period for transmitting gaming machine installation information has not arrived. When the gaming machine installation information notification is transmitted, it is updated from "1" to "0".
It is also possible to use a 1-byte storage area for the gaming machine performance information notification request flag and another 1-byte storage area for the gaming machine installation information notification request flag. However, if the gaming machine information notification request flag is provided as a 1-byte storage area as in this embodiment and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag are assigned to bits of this 1-byte storage area, the storage capacity can be reduced.

FIG. 40 is a time chart showing the update sequence of the values of the gaming machine information notification timers A, B, and C.
In Figure 40, a gaming machine information notification including hall control and fraud monitoring information based on the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is referred to as "notification A", a gaming machine information notification including gaming machine installation information based on the value of gaming machine information notification timer B is referred to as "notification B", and a gaming machine information notification including gaming machine performance information based on the value of gaming machine information notification timer C is referred to as "notification C".
First, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, an initialization process of the RWM 103 of the gaming media count control board 100 is executed, thereby clearing the values of the gaming machine information notification timers A, B, and C ("0" is stored).

The CPU 105 of the game media count control board 100 includes a flag register (F register). The flag register includes a carry flag (CY) and a zero flag (Z). The flag register also includes flags other than these flags, but the description of these will be omitted in this embodiment.
The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the result of an arithmetic operation is less than "0", in other words, when a borrow occurs.
The zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the result of the arithmetic processing becomes "0".

Specific examples of the carry flag and the zero flag are as follows:
Example 1) When the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "10" and "1" is subtracted, the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "9." At this time, the zero flag and the carry flag do not change (they remain at "0").
Example 2) When the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "1" and "1" is subtracted, the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "0". As a result, the zero flag becomes "1". Meanwhile, the carry flag does not change (it remains at "0"). Here, in the calculation process of this embodiment, when the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" and the zero flag becomes "1", it is immediately updated to "300" (during the interrupt process in which it was updated to "0" as a result of subtracting "1")

Example 3) When the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "0" and "1" is subtracted, the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "300". At this time, the zero flag does not change (it remains "0"). Meanwhile, the carry flag becomes "1".
The value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before subtraction is "0" only when it is initialized after power-on. Therefore, the carry flag becomes "1" when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "0" to "300" in the first interrupt process after power-on.

When the result of updating the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is that either the carry flag or the zero flag becomes "1", it is determined that the timing to send notification A has arrived. This enables the gaming machine 10 to send notification A to the lending unit 200. In FIG. 40, after the gaming machine information notification timer A is initialized to "0" when the power is turned on, the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "0" to "300" by the first interrupt process, and notification A is sent when the carry flag (CY) becomes "1" ("*1" in the figure).

Next, an interrupt is executed every "1" ms, and the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "299", "298", ..., but unless either the carry flag or the zero flag becomes "1", it is not determined that the timing to send notification A has arrived, so notification A is not sent. Since "60" seconds and "180" seconds are also multiples of "300" ms, naturally notification B and notification C are not sent either.
As mentioned above, the carry flag becomes "1" due to the update of the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A only during the first interrupt processing after the power is turned on, but thereafter, the carry flag does not become "1" due to the update of the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A.

When the number of interrupts reaches "300" (i.e., when "300" ms have elapsed since the first notification A was sent ("*1" in the figure), the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (and further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1". Therefore, it is determined that the timing to send notification A has arrived. As a result, the gaming machine 10 sends notification A to the rental unit 200 ("*2" in the figure).

Next, when the number of interrupts reaches "6000" since the first transmission of notification A ("*1" in the figure), that is, when "60" seconds have elapsed, the timer value etc. are updated as follows:
First, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (and further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1" (in the figure, "*3"). Therefore, it is determined that the timing for sending notification A has arrived.
Secondly, the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated from "199" to "0." When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated to "0," it is determined that the timing to send notification B has arrived, and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is updated to "1."

At this point in time, the timing for sending notification A has arrived, and the timing for sending notification B has also arrived. Therefore, since notification B is given priority over notification A, notification B is sent at this timing (in the figure, "*4"). When notification B is sent, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is updated to "0".
Then, after "300" ms has elapsed from that timing, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated again from "1" to "0" (and further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1." Based on the fact that the zero flag (Z) has become "1," it is determined that the timing for sending notification A has arrived, and notification A is sent (in the figure, "*5").

In this way, when the transmission of notification B is given priority at the transmission timing of "*3" in the figure, notification A is not transmitted at that timing, and notification A is transmitted at timing of "*5" 300 ms after that timing.
Here, when notification A is transmitted at the timing of "*5" in the figure, the hall control/fraud monitoring information obtained immediately before the transmission is stored in a designated transmission register, and a gaming machine information notification including the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted.
In other words, the hall control/fraud monitoring information is not acquired at the transmission timing of "*3" in the figure, stored in a designated transmission register, and then the hall control/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted at the timing of "*5" in the figure.

When it is determined that notification A will not be sent at the transmission timing of "*3" in the figure, the hole control/fraud monitoring information at that time may be configured not to be stored in the specified transmission register. However, to simplify processing, when the transmission timing of notification A arrives, the hole control/fraud monitoring information at that time is uniformly stored in the specified transmission register. Then, every "300" ms, in other words every time the zero flag (Z) becomes "1", the hole control/fraud monitoring information at that time is stored (overwritten) in the specified transmission register.

Next, when the number of interrupts reaches "18,000" since the first transmission of notification A ("*1" in the figure), that is, when "180" seconds have elapsed, the timer value etc. are updated as follows:
First, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (and further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1"("*6" in the figure). Based on the fact that the zero flag (Z) has become "1", it is determined that the timing for sending notification A has arrived.

Secondly, the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated from "199" to "0". When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated to "0", it is determined that the timing for sending notification B has arrived, and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is updated to "1"("*7" in the figure).
Third, the gaming machine information notification timer C is updated from "2" to "0." When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C is updated to "0," it is determined that the timing to send notification C has arrived, and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is updated to "1"("*8" in the figure).

At this point, the timing for sending notification A has arrived, the timing for sending notification B has arrived, and the timing for sending notification C has arrived. Therefore, the timing for sending notifications A, B, and C all overlap. In this case, since notification B is sent with first priority, notification B is sent at this timing ("*7" in the diagram). In other words, notifications A and C are not sent at this timing. When notification B is sent, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is updated to "0". Note that notification C has not been sent at this point, so the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) remains at "1".

When "300" ms has elapsed from this timing and the timing to transmit the gaming machine information notification arrives, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (and further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1" (in the figure, "*9"). Based on the fact that the zero flag (Z) has become "1", it is determined that the timing to transmit the notification A has arrived.
Also, at this timing, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is "1". Therefore, the timing for sending notification C has arrived. When the timing for sending notifications A and C overlap, notification C takes priority, so notification C is sent ("*10" in the figure). In other words, notification A will not be sent at this timing. When notification C is sent, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is updated to "0".

After 300 ms have elapsed from this point, the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from 1 to 0 (and further updated to 300), and the zero flag (Z) becomes 1 (indicated by *11 in the diagram). Based on the zero flag (Z) becoming 1, it is determined that the timing to send notification A has arrived. Furthermore, at this point, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) are both 0, so it is not the timing to send notification B, nor is it the timing to send notification C. Therefore, at this timing, notification A is sent (indicated by *11 in the diagram).

When notification A is sent at the timing of "*11" in the diagram, the hall control/fraud monitoring information acquired immediately before the transmission is stored in a specified transmission register, and a gaming machine information notification containing that hall control/fraud monitoring information is sent. In other words, it is not the hall control/fraud monitoring information acquired at the timing of "*6" or "*9" in the diagram.

As described above, when either the carry flag or the zero flag becomes "1", it is determined that the timing to transmit notification A has arrived.
Therefore, this is different from the control in the above-mentioned role ratio monitor 113, which switches between on and off when the carry flag becomes "0" as a result of updating the blinking switching time.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing gaming machine information management.
Here, "gaming machine information management" refers to a control process for transmitting a gaming machine information notification from the gaming machine 10 to the rental unit 200. The process in Fig. 41 is one subroutine in the timer interrupt process executed by the gaming media count control board 100. In other words, gaming machine information management is executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed (at a period of "1" ms).
First, in step S721, "1" is subtracted from the gaming machine information notification timer A (the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S722, where it is determined whether the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "0". When the carry flag becomes "1" in the subtraction process of step S721, it is determined that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "0". Note that the carry flag becomes "1" because the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update was "0" corresponds to the case where the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "0" (initialized) when the power is turned on and then "1" is subtracted. When it is determined that the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "0", the process proceeds to step S733, and when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, it is determined whether the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "1". In other words, it is determined whether the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A has become "0" as a result of the update, or in other words, whether the zero flag has become "1" as a result of the update. If it is determined that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "1", the process proceeds to step S724, and if it is determined that the value is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
When the value of gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "1", it means that it is the timing of a "300" ms period, that is, the timing of transmitting a gaming machine information notification including hall control and fraud monitoring information.

On the other hand, when it is not the timing to send notification A, it is not a timing of a "300" ms cycle, so it is not a timing of a "60" second cycle, and it is not a timing of a "180" second cycle. In other words, it is not the timing of sending a gaming machine information notification including gaming machine installation information, and it is not the timing of sending gaming machine installation information including gaming machine performance information. Therefore, when it is determined that it is not the timing to send gaming machine installation information including hall control and fraud monitoring information, gaming machine information management is terminated without determining whether it is the timing of sending a gaming machine information notification including gaming machine installation information or whether it is the timing of sending gaming machine installation information including gaming machine performance information. This makes it possible to simplify program processing and speed up gaming machine information management.

In step S724, an initial value is stored in the value of gaming machine information notification timer A. Here, the initial value is "300 (D)." Since the timer interrupt period of the gaming media count control board 100 in this embodiment is "1" ms, storing "300 (D)" as the value of gaming machine information notification timer A makes it possible to count "300" ms. Therefore, when the calculation result becomes "0" by the subtraction in step S721, "300" is immediately stored in step S724.
For example, if the timer interrupt period of the game media count control board 100 is "2" ms, then the game machine information notification timer A should store "150(D)".
Also, for example, if the timer interrupt period of the gaming media count control board 100 is set to "2.235" ms, any value in the range of "135" to "138" may be stored in the gaming machine information notification timer A. In this way, if the "gaming machine information notification transmission period/timer interrupt period" is not an integer (is not divisible), any value that results in the gaming machine information notification transmission timing being between "300" ms to "310" ms can be set as the initial value.

An example of the calculation instruction in step S721 described above is the DCPWLD instruction. The DCPWLD instruction is an instruction to store a predetermined value when the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtracting "1". In this embodiment, the predetermined value is "300". Therefore, after the power is turned on, the gaming machine information notification timer A is initialized to "0" and then, in the gaming machine information management process in the first interrupt process, when "1" is subtracted in step S721, the carry flag becomes "1" and the predetermined value "300" is stored.
In this way, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "0" by the initialization process when the power is turned on, but otherwise, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A will never become "0" (except in the event of an abnormality), except for the period after the processing of step S721 and before the processing of step S724.

In the next step S725, a process is executed to add "1" to the value of gaming machine information notification timer B. A special addition command is used for the addition process here. Specifically, when a value less than "199" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer B, "1" is added to the value of gaming machine information notification timer B, and when the value of gaming machine information notification timer B is not less than "199" (i.e., when "199" is stored under normal operating conditions), "0" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer B.

Specific examples are as follows:
Example 1) When "0" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer B, when a calculation process is performed using a special addition instruction to add "1", the value becomes "1".
Example 2) When "100" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer B, when a calculation process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds "1", gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "101".
Example 3) When "199" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer B, if a calculation process is performed using a special addition command to add "1", the value of gaming machine information notification timer B will become "0" instead of "200". For example, this corresponds to the calculation at the timing of "*4" in FIG. 40 mentioned above.

In this way, by performing calculation processing using a special addition instruction that adds "1" to gaming machine information notification timer B, the value of gaming machine information notification timer B can be cycled between "0" and "199".
Moreover, the situation where "1" is added when "199" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer B corresponds to the situation where the gaming machine information notification timer A has reached "0" 200 times. In other words, since gaming machine information notification timer B is incremented by "1" every time the interrupt process is executed 300 times, this is a situation where the interrupt process has been executed 300 times x 200 times = 60,000 times (60 seconds have passed).

Normally, a memory area of "2" bytes would be required to measure whether or not the interrupt process has been executed "60,000" times. However, by updating the gaming machine information notification timer B based on the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A, the memory area of the gaming machine information notification timer B can be set to "1" byte, and the memory capacity of the RWM 103 can be reduced.
In addition, an example of an arithmetic instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer B is the ICPLD instruction.
In the above example, a command to add "1" to gaming machine information notification timer B is executed, but a command to subtract "1" may also be executed. In the case of a subtraction command, "200" may be stored as an initial value in gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and "200" may be stored when the timer becomes "0" thereafter. Alternatively, "199" may be stored as an initial value in gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and "200" may be stored when the carry flag becomes "1" thereafter.

In addition, because the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated using an addition command, the process of setting the initial value can be omitted compared to when a subtraction command is used (the initial value becomes "0" due to the initialization process when the power is turned on), which allows for improved processing speed and reduced program capacity.

In step S726, it is determined whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed. Here, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "0" by adding "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed. On the other hand, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B does not become "0" by adding "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has not elapsed.
If it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S727, and if it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S731.
In step S727, a process of adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is executed.
A special addition command is used for the addition process here. Specifically, when a value less than "2" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer B, "1" is added to the value of gaming machine information notification timer C, and when the value of gaming machine information notification timer C is not less than "2" (i.e., when "3" is stored under normal operating conditions), "0" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer C.

Specific examples are as follows:
Example 1) When "0" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer C, when a calculation process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds "1", the value becomes "1".
Example 2) When the gaming machine information notification timer C stores "1", when a calculation process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds "1", the gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "2".
Example 3) When "2" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer C, if a calculation process is performed using a special addition command to add "1", the value of gaming machine information notification timer B will become "0" instead of "3". For example, this corresponds to the calculation at the timing of "*8" in FIG. 40 mentioned above.

In this way, by performing calculation processing using a special addition instruction that adds "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C can be cycled between "0" and "2".
Moreover, the situation where "1" is added when "2" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer C corresponds to the situation where the gaming machine information notification timer B has become "0""3" times. In other words, gaming machine information notification timer B is incremented by "1" every time the interrupt process is executed "300" times, and gaming machine information notification timer C is incremented by "1" every time gaming machine information notification timer B is updated "200" times, so this is a situation where the interrupt process has been executed "300 times x 200 times x 3 times = 180,000 times"("180" seconds have passed).

Normally, a memory area of 3 bytes would be required to measure whether or not the interrupt process has been executed 180,000 times, but since the value of gaming machine information notification timer B is updated based on the value of gaming machine information notification timer A, and the value of gaming machine information notification timer C is further updated based on the value of gaming machine information notification timer B, the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer C can be 1 byte, and the memory capacity of RWM 103 can be reduced.
Furthermore, an example of an arithmetic instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is the above-mentioned ICPLD instruction.
In the above example, a command to add "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is executed, but a subtraction command may also be executed. In the case of a subtraction command, an initial value of "3" may be stored as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and "3" may be stored when the timer becomes "0" thereafter. Alternatively, an initial value of "2" may be stored as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and "3" may be stored when the carry flag becomes "1" thereafter.

However, as in this embodiment, if the gaming machine information notification timer C is updated with an addition command, the process of setting the initial value can be omitted compared to when it is updated with a subtraction command (the initial value becomes "0" due to the initialization process when the power is turned on), which allows for improved processing speed and reduced program capacity.

In step S728, it is determined whether or not the time has elapsed on the gaming machine information notification timer C. Here, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "0" by adding "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed. On the other hand, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C does not become "0" by adding "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has not elapsed.
If it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S729, and if it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S730.

The process of step S727 is executed only when step S726 is judged as "Yes". This is because the timing for updating gaming machine information notification timer C is limited to when gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "0". Furthermore, in the next step S728, it is determined whether the time on gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed only when step S726 is judged as "Yes". Whether the time on gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed depends on whether a "180" second cycle has arrived, and the time on the "180" second cycle always arrives when a "60" second cycle has arrived (the time on gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed).

In step S729, a gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. This process stores "1" in the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag. In the next step S730, a gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set. This process stores "1" in the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag.
That is, when it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed, a period of "180" seconds has arrived, and since a period of "180" seconds includes a period of "60" seconds, the timing for notifying the gaming machine performance information has arrived, and the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information has arrived. Therefore, both the "D0" and "D1" bits of the gaming machine information notification request flag are set to "1".

In contrast, when it is determined in step S726 that the time set by gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed and that the time set by gaming machine information notification timer C has not elapsed, this means that the 60-second period (the timing for notifying gaming machine installation information) has arrived, but the 180-second period (the timing for notifying gaming machine performance information) has not arrived. Therefore, in this case, the processing of step S729 is not executed, and only the processing of step S730 is executed, and only the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "1."

In this way, the timing for transmitting gaming machine installation information and the timing for transmitting gaming machine performance information are managed by flags, so the process for transmitting hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information can be simplified. In other words, by linking the timers corresponding to various information, it becomes possible to transmit without managing them individually. Furthermore, there is no deviation in the timing for starting the timers for transmitting hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, so accurate transmission is possible.

In the next step S731, it is determined whether or not there is a request for notification of gaming machine installation information. Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set. Therefore, if the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is "1", it is determined that there is a request for notification of gaming machine installation information, and if the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no request for notification of gaming machine installation information.
If it is determined that there is a request for notification of gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S734, and if it is determined that there is no request for notification of gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S732.
In step S732, it is determined whether or not there is a request for notification of gaming machine performance information. Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. Therefore, if the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is "1", it is determined that there is a request for notification of gaming machine performance information, and if the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no request for notification of gaming machine performance information.
If it is determined that there is a request for notification of gaming machine performance information, the process proceeds to step S736, and if it is determined that there is no request for notification of gaming machine performance information, the process proceeds to step S733.

In step S733, a process of transmitting the hole control and fraud monitoring information is executed. Here, the hole control and fraud monitoring information stored in the RWM 103 of the game media count control board 100 is acquired, the information is stored in a transmission register, and the information is transmitted. After transmission, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In addition, when it is determined in step S722 that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "0", the transmission process of the hall control/fraud monitoring information is executed without executing the determination of whether the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B or the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed (the processing of step S726 or step S728). The reason is that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "0" only at the time of the subtraction process in the first interrupt processing immediately after the power is turned on. In other words, it is impossible that "60" seconds or "180" seconds have elapsed at the time of the subtraction process in the first interrupt processing immediately after the power is turned on. In such a case, the transmission process of the hall control/fraud monitoring information is executed without executing the determination of whether the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B or the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed, thereby making it possible to speed up the processing (speed up the transmission process).

In addition, in step S731, it is determined whether or not there is a request for notification of gaming machine installation information, and if it is determined that there is no request for notification of gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S732 to determine whether or not there is a request for notification of gaming machine performance information. By using such a processing order, in a situation where both the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag are set (a situation where the "180" second period has arrived), it is first determined whether or not there is a request for notification of gaming machine installation information, so that the transmission process of the gaming machine installation information can be executed (given priority) before the transmission process of the gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, as described above, when the hole control/tampering monitoring information is transmitted in step S733, the latest information at that time is transmitted.
For example, the (total) number of gaming media included in the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted as information stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a (_NB_MEDAL) at the time of transmission. In other words, if the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, which is the transmission timing of every "300" ms, overlaps with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information or the gaming machine performance information, the transmission of the gaming machine installation information or the gaming machine performance information takes priority, so the hall control/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted at that timing, and the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted after the next "300" ms has elapsed (if it overlaps with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information) or after "600" ms has elapsed (if it overlaps with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information). This "hall control/fraud monitoring information transmitted after 300 ms or 600 ms" is not the hall control/fraud monitoring information at the time when it overlaps with the timing of transmitting the gaming machine installation information, but the hall control/fraud monitoring information obtained at the timing of transmitting the hall control/fraud monitoring information after 300 ms or 600 ms. Therefore, even if the timing of transmitting the hall control/fraud monitoring information is delayed, it is possible to transmit the latest information.

After the transmission process of the hall control/fraud monitoring information is completed, the serial number is updated (increased by "1"). As with the counting serial number, the serial number is updated so that "0" is transmitted as the serial number when transmitting immediately after the power is restored, and thereafter any of "1" to "255" can be transmitted (so that it cycles through "1" to "255"). This serial number is updated when any of the three pieces of information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, is transmitted. In other words, since the same serial number is used for the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, the serial number is configured to be updated every "300" ms when the power is on.

When the process proceeds from step S731 to step S734, a transmission process of the gaming machine installation information is executed. The content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the gaming media count control board 100 that was acquired at this timing. Next, the process proceeds to step S735, where the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "0". Furthermore, after the transmission process of the gaming machine installation information is completed, the serial number is updated ("1" is added). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S732 to step S736, a transmission process of the gaming machine performance information is executed. The content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the gaming media count control board 100 that was acquired at this timing. Next, the process proceeds to step S735, where the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "0". Furthermore, after the transmission process of the gaming machine performance information is completed, the serial number is updated ("1" is added). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the relationship between the gaming machine information notification timers A to C and the information stored in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 will be described.
As described above, each of the memory areas of the gaming machine information notification timers A to C is provided in the RWM 103 of the gaming media count control board 100. These memory areas are cleared ("0" is stored) by the initialization process when the power is turned on.
On the other hand, in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100, in addition to the data memory areas described above, for example, the following data memory areas are provided as data memory areas necessary for controlling the lighting of the role ratio monitor 113.
"400" game number counter (a counter for counting "400" games)
Total award number ring buffer "0" to "14" (each a buffer that counts the total award number between "400" games)
Consecutive feature award number ring buffer "0" to "14" (each a buffer that counts the number of consecutive feature awards between "400" games)
Ring buffer for number of bonus items given "0" to "14" (each buffer counts the number of bonus items given between "400" games)
Total number of games played counter (storage area for counting the total number of games played)
Counter for counting number of times played in favorable zone (storage area for counting number of times played in favorable zone)
Total number of grants counter (storage area for the count value of the total number of grants)
Instruction number counter (storage area for the number of instructions given when the instruction function is activated)
Consecutive feature grant number counter (storage area for the number of grants when continuous features are activated)
Number of bonuses counter (storage area for the number of bonuses when bonuses are activated)
Indicated role ratio data (storage area for calculated indicated role ratio)
Advantageous zone ratio data (storage area for calculated advantageous zone ratio)
Continuous feature ratio data (calculated continuous feature ratio storage area)
Reel ratio data (storage area for calculated reel ratio)
Reel state ratio data (storage area for calculated reel state ratio)
Blink switching time (storage area for count value related to blink switching time) (described above)
Blinking switch flag (storage area for the flag that determines whether the light is on or off) (described above)
The above data storage area is a part of the data storage area required for controlling the lighting of the role ratio monitor 113, and is not limited to the above.

Of the above storage areas, the ring buffer, game play counter, award counter, and ratio data storage areas are not initialized when the power is turned on/off or when settings are changed. This is because the correct ratio is displayed reflecting the past game history even when the power is turned on/off or settings are changed.
However, if an unrecoverable error such as an RWM abnormal error occurs, all of the above storage areas are initialized so that no invalid data remains after recovery.
On the other hand, the blinking switching time and the blinking switching flag are initialized (cleared) by turning the power on/off or changing the settings. This allows the test pattern to be displayed for 4800 ms every time the power is turned on. Also, even if the blinking display is to be performed after the power is turned on, it can start from the first lighting of 3 seconds.

In addition, the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is provided with storage areas for data such as those listed below, in addition to the bet number storage means 53a and the award number storage means 53b shown in FIG.
Input port level data (storage area for data that determines whether each switch is in an operated state)
Input port rising edge data (storage area for data to determine whether each switch has been operated)
Section type number (storage area for numbers to manage advantageous sections)
MY counter (storage area for difference number)
Winning and replay condition device number (storage area for the winning and replay condition device numbers that operate in the game)
Device number (storage area for the number of the device that operates in the game)
Minimum play period (a storage area for a timer value for monitoring the minimum play period (4.1 seconds) of one game)
Game standby display time (storage area for the timer value that measures the time until transition to game standby)
The above data storage area is a part of the data storage area of the RWM 53, and is not limited to the above.

Furthermore, since the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is a medal-less gaming machine, it is not provided with, for example, the following memory areas which are provided in gaming machines which use medals as tangible objects.
Blocker signal (blocker on/off storage area)
Hopper motor drive signal (hopper motor on/off storage area)
Payout sensor check time (storage area for timer value to detect coin jam)
Blocker monitoring time (storage area for the timer value indicating the waiting time for the blocker to be turned on/off)
Medal payout control time (storage area for timer values indicating the control time of the medal payout device)

In the above-mentioned memory area of the RWM 53, for example, the minimum play time is not initialized by turning the power on/off. Therefore, if the power is turned off during the measurement of the first play time, the measurement of the minimum play time is resumed when the power is turned on thereafter, and when it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, the start of the game (the start of the rotation of the reel 31) is permitted.
For this reason, the minimum playing time and gaming machine information notification timers A to C are common in that they all store timer values for measuring time, but differ in whether or not they are initialized when the power is turned on/off.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200 are capable of communicating with each other via the gaming media number control board 100 and the connection terminal board 130, but this is not limiting, and the main control board 50 and the connection terminal board 130 may be connected, and the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200 may be capable of communicating with each other via the main control board 50 and the connection terminal board 130. By configuring as described above and not installing the gaming media number control board 100, production costs can be reduced.
In this case, all of the processing controlled by the game media number control board 100 is performed by the main control board 50. When the functions of the main control board 50 and the game media number control board 100 are realized on the same board, a CPU 55 that controls the functions of the main control board 50 and a CPU 105 that controls the functions of the game media number control board 100 can be separately provided to realize processing similar to that of the above-mentioned embodiment.

(2) In the above embodiment, the gaming machine installation information transmitted every "60" seconds is given first priority, followed by the gaming machine performance information transmitted every "180" seconds as second priority. However, this is merely an example, and for example, in the case of having gaming machine information notification 1 transmitted every "T1" seconds and gaming machine information notification 2 transmitted every "T2" seconds (T2 > T1), the specifications may be such that gaming machine information notification 2 is transmitted with priority over gaming machine information notification 1.

(3) The memory area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 and the RWM 103 of the game media count control board 100 is generally divided into an area within the usage region and an area outside the usage region.
Here, "within the area of use" refers to an area in the memory area of the RWM for storing data related to the progress of the game.
On the other hand, "outside the area in use" refers to an area in the memory area of the RWM for storing data that is not related to the progress of the game.
Therefore, since data relating to the display control of the role ratio monitor 113 is data that is not related to the progress of the game, it is generally stored outside the area used by the RWM.
For example, when the main control board 50 executes the display control of the role ratio monitor, data related to the display control of the role ratio monitor is stored outside the usage area of the RWM 53. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity in the usage area of the RWM 53.

However, not limited to this, when the display control of the role ratio monitor 113 is executed by the gaming medium number control board 100, since there is little risk that the data related to the display control of the role ratio monitor 113 will put a strain on the memory capacity in the usage area of the RWM 103, it is also possible to provide a data memory area related to the display control of the role ratio monitor 113 within the usage area of the RWM 103.
(4) In the above embodiment, a slot machine (a reel-type gaming machine) was used as an example of the gaming machine 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this and can be applied to various gaming machines such as casino machines.

Third Embodiment
The third embodiment relates to the structure and instructions of the main CPU 55. In the third embodiment, the RWM 53, the ROM 54, and the main CPU 55 are provided on the main control board 50, similarly to the first embodiment.
Fig. 42 is a diagram showing the built-in memory of the main CPU 55 in the third embodiment. In the figure, (A) is a diagram showing an overview of the built-in memory, and (B) is a diagram showing the built-in register area of the storage area in the built-in memory. Fig. 42 shows only the part of the built-in memory that is related to this embodiment, and does not show the entire built-in memory.
Within the areas of ROM 54, the first program area and the first data area correspond to the area within use (area for storing programs and data related to the progress of the game), and the second program area and the second data area correspond to the area outside the use (area for storing programs and data not related to the progress of the game. For example, an area for storing programs and data relating to the display control of the role ratio monitor, and programs and data relating to the output control of the test signal.).
The "program area" is also called the "control area."

The ROM 54 has an address range of 0000h to 2FFFh and a storage area of 12K bytes. Within this storage area, the first program area is set to 4.5K bytes, and the first data area is set to 3.0K bytes.
Furthermore, in the RWM 53, the first working area and the first stack area are storage areas used (updated, referenced) during the execution of a first program (a program related to the progress of a game) stored in the first program area. Similarly, the second working area and the second stack area are storage areas used (updated, referenced) during the execution of a second program (a program not related to the progress of a game, for example, a program related to the display of a winning ratio monitor) stored in the second program area.
Furthermore, the first program stored in the first program area cannot update the data in the second working area and the second stack area, but can refer to the data in the second working area and the second stack area.
Similarly, the second program stored in the second program area cannot update the data in the first working area and the first stack area, but can reference the data in the first working area and the first stack area.

The built-in register region (synonymous with the built-in register area) includes a register bank 0 and a register bank 1. Each register bank includes a main register (front register) and a sub-register (back register). The main register includes a so-called general-purpose register.
In the following description, the sub-registers will be omitted, and the term "register" refers to the main register.

The registers in register bank 0 are registers that are used when a program stored in the first program area is being executed. Similarly, the registers in register bank 1 are registers that are used when a program stored in the second program area is being executed. For example, the A register, F register, etc. are each provided in both register bank 0 and register bank 1. In other words, the A register in register bank 0 and the A register in register bank 1 are different registers.

The A register is an accumulator.
The F register is a flag register, the structure of which will be described later.
The B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are general purpose registers.
The IX and IY registers are index registers, and are used, for example, when specifying an address.
The SP register is a stack pointer register that specifies the address to which data is saved when data is saved to the stack area, and specifies the address to which data is restored when data is restored from the stack area.
Specifically, the SP register of register bank 0 specifies an address in the first stack area (the range of "F1D0h" to "F1FFh"). Similarly, the SP register of register bank 1 specifies an address in the second stack area (the range of "F3E8h" to "F3FFh").

In addition to register banks 0 and 1, there are I, R, PC, and IFF registers.
The I register is an interrupt register and is used when executing an interrupt process.
The R register is a refresh register and is used to refresh the RWM 53 .
The PC register is a program counter, which holds the currently executing address in memory.

The IFF register is an interrupt enable register. The IFF register is composed of an IFF1 register that determines whether a maskable interrupt (INT) is enabled or disabled, and an IFF2 register that is used to restore IFF1 after processing a non-maskable interrupt (NMI). The IFF2 register is used not only to return from non-maskable interrupt processing, but also to return by a RETEX instruction (described later) after executing a CALLEX instruction (described later).
Furthermore, when a non-markable interrupt is accepted or when the CALEX instruction is executed, the IFF1 register is cleared (set to a value ("0") that prohibits interrupt processing), maskable interrupts are prohibited, and the IFF2 register holds the state at that time (whether the interrupts were in the interrupt disabled state or interrupt enabled state when the non-markable interrupt was accepted or when the CALEX instruction was executed). Furthermore, by executing the RET instruction or RETEX instruction, the value of the IFF2 register is moved to the IFF1 register, and the acceptance state of maskable interrupts is restored to the previous state.

43 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the F register. The F register is made up of one byte (8 bits, shown as "D0" to "D7" in the diagram). The structure of the F register is as follows:
(1) D0 bit: Carry Flag (C)
The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" if a carry or borrow occurs as a result of an operation, and becomes "0" if no carry or borrow occurs.
(2) D1 bit: Subtraction flag (N)
The subtraction flag is a flag that is set to "1" if the immediately preceding instruction is a subtraction instruction, and is set to "0" if the immediately preceding instruction is not a subtraction instruction.

(3) D2 bit: Parity/Overflow Flag (P/V)
The parity/overflow flag is a flag that becomes "1" if the number of "1" bits (parity) in the calculation result is even, and becomes "0" if it is odd. Also, this flag becomes "1" if an overflow occurs as a result of the calculation, and becomes "0" if no overflow occurs.
(4) D3 bit: Register Bank Monitor (RB)
The register bank monitor is a flag that is set to "0" when register bank 0 is in use and to "1" when register bank 1 is in use. Therefore, by referring to the D3 bit of the F register, it is possible to determine whether register bank 0 or 1 is in use.

(5) D4 bit: Half carry flag (H)
The half carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when there is a carry from the lower 4 bits to the upper 4 bits during an arithmetic operation, and becomes "0" when there is no carry.
(6) D5 bit: Second Zero Flag (TZ)
The second zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the operation result is "0" and becomes "0" if the operation result is not "0".
(7) D6 bit: Zero Flag (Z)
As described above, the zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the operation result is "0" and becomes "0" if the operation result is not "0".
(8) D7 bit: Sign Flag (S)
The sign flag is a flag that becomes "0" if the operation result is positive, and becomes "1" if the operation result is negative.

Fig. 44 is a diagram showing the stack area in the third embodiment. As shown in Fig. 42, the RWM 53 includes a first stack area ("F1D0h" to "F1FFh") for the first program and a second stack area ("F3E8h" to "F3FFh") for the second program.
As described above, when storing (also called piling, saving, stacking, etc.) data in the first stack area, the data is piled in ascending order (reverse order) from the last address. For example, when first piling two bytes of data in the first stack area, the data is stored at "F1FFh" and "F1FEh".
The same applies to the second stack area, with data being stacked in order starting from the final address (F3FFh).

The SP register stores a value indicating which address in the stack area data is to be stored at. As shown in FIG. 42, SP registers are provided in both register banks 0 and 1, and the SP register in register bank 0 stores which address in the first stack area data is to be stored at. Similarly, the SP register in register bank 1 stores which address in the second stack area data is to be stored at.

As shown in FIG. 44, when power is turned on, the SP register of register bank 0 stores the initial value "F200h" in accordance with the instruction "LD SP, F200h."
Next, when some program (such as a CALL instruction (also referred to as a "first call instruction"), a CALLEX instruction (also referred to as a "second call instruction"), or a PUSH instruction (also referred to as a "register save instruction")) is executed and data is loaded into the two-byte area of "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" in the first stack area, the SP register value of register bank 0 is updated to "F1FEh". Note that the example in FIG. 44 shows an example in which "CALL mn" is executed.
Next, when the data stored in "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" in the first stack area is to be called, some program (RET instruction (also called "first return instruction"), RETEX instruction (also called "second return instruction"), POP instruction (also called "register restore instruction"), etc.) is executed. Then, the data stored in the 2-byte memory area of "F1FEh" and "F1FFh" is called by this instruction. For example, the RET instruction (example of FIG. 44) returns to the instruction after CALL (returns to the program of the program counter saved in the stack area (returns to the program of the return address)), and the SP register value of register bank 0 is updated from "F1FEh" to "F200h".

The same applies to the second stack area.
When power is turned on, the SP register of register bank 1 stores the initial value "F400h" in response to the command "LD SP, F400h."
Next, when some program (CALL instruction, PUSH instruction, etc.) is executed and data is pushed to "F3FFh" in the second stack area, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated to "F1FFh".
Next, when calling the data stored in "F3FFh" of the second stack area, some program (RET instruction, RETEX instruction, POP instruction, etc.) is executed. Then, the data stored in the 1-byte storage area of "F3FFh" is called by the instruction, and the instruction after CALL is returned to by the RET instruction or RETEX instruction, and the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated from "F3FFh" to "F400h".

Although details of the instructions will be described later, in this embodiment, the CALLEX instruction is an instruction that is included in the first program (when register bank 0) but is not included in the second program (when register bank 1).
Moreover, the RETEX instruction is not included in the first program (when the register bank is 0) but is included in the second program (when the register bank is 1).

Fig. 45 is a diagram showing main commands in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, there are several thousand types of commands, but Fig. 45 shows three representative types.
In the figure, (A) indicates an LDF instruction.
In FIG. 45, first, the opcode and operands in the command statement will be described.
As shown in (A) in the figure, when the instruction is "LDF HL, mn", the first half "LDF" may be called the opcode (function) and the latter half "HL, mn" may be called the operand (argument). The LDF instruction is one aspect of the LD (load) instruction (a special form. Why it is special will be explained later). Furthermore, "HL" indicates the HL register, and "mn" indicates the address. The instruction "LDF HL, mn" is an instruction that instructs storing the value of address "mn" in the HL register.
As will be described later, the LDF instruction is not limited to an instruction to store an address value in a specified register, but may also be an instruction to store a specified value (however, the "specified value" is limited to a specified range (described later)) in a specified register.

Specifically, for example, when "LDF HL, 1200h" is executed,
1200h = 0001/0010/0000/0000 ("/" is inserted every 4 bits. The same applies below.)
Therefore,
H register value = 0001/0010
L register value = 0000/0000
It becomes.

Furthermore, the LDF instruction is limited to instructions that store a value in the range of "1200h" to "1DFF" in a register (the HL register in this example). The opcode for other load instructions is "LD" instead of "LDF".
That is,
LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h~1DFFh)
LD HL, mn (mn≠1200h~1DFFh)
It is.

Fig. 46 is a diagram showing the modes of the LDF command and the LD command. As shown in Fig. 42, the range of the first data area is from address "1200h" to "1DF3h". Therefore, in the case of a load command that specifies an address in the first data area, it can all be executed with the LDF command.
In contrast, the second data area is in the address range of "2600h" to "2FBEh." Therefore, in the case of a load instruction that specifies an address in the second data area, the opcode "LDF" cannot be used, and instead the opcode "LD" is used.
In FIG. 46, (A) shows an LDF command that specifies the address range from "1200h" to "1DF3h" (first data area), and (B) shows an LD command that specifies the address range from "2600h" to "2FBEh" (second data area).

Furthermore, the load instruction is not limited to an instruction for storing a specific address value in a specific register, but may also be used as an instruction for storing, for example, any register value in any other register.
46C shows "LDF HL, xy," which is an instruction to store a predetermined value "xy" (within the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh") in the HL register using the LDF instruction. In this way, when the value of "xy" is within the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh," the LDF instruction can also be used as an instruction to store the value in a predetermined register.
For example, in the case of a command to store a timer value "5000(D)" (1388h) in the HL register, the command would be "LDF HL, 1388h".
46D shows "LD A, (HL)", an instruction to store a specified register value (HL register value in this example) in another specified register (A register in this example) using the LD instruction. In an instruction to copy a specified register value to another specified register, if the specified register value or the specified value to be copied is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", the LD instruction (rather than the LDF instruction) is used.

Also, all instructions such as "LDF HL,mn" and "LD HL,mn" are actually encoded and stored in the program area of ROM 54.
In the third embodiment, the code size of "LDF HL,mn" is 2 bytes, and the code size of "LD HL,mn" is 3 bytes.
First, in the case of the instruction "LDF HL, mn", the range of "mn" is "1200h" to "1DFFh". If "1200h" and "1DFFh" (both in hexadecimal) are expressed in decimal and binary, respectively, they become
1200h=4608(D)=0001/0010/0000/0000(B)
1DFFh=7679(D)=0001/1101/1111/1111(B)
It becomes.

When "1200h" is taken as the reference value "0", "1DFFh" becomes "3070(D)" or "1011/1111/1110(B)" (12 bits).
Therefore, in the opcode for specifying the address value in the LDF instruction, "1200h" is set to a value of "0." This means that 12 bits are sufficient to specify the address value "mn"(mn="1200h" to "1DFFh").

Also assume that the total number of instructions is, for example, "3000," and that a unique value is assigned to each instruction.
in this case,
3000(D) = 1011/1011/1000(B) (12 bits)
Therefore, they can be assigned to "0000/0000/0000(B)" to "1011/1011/1000(B)".
In the case of particularly important instructions, specifically, instructions that are used frequently, for example, a small value is assigned. In this embodiment, the code value of "LDF HL" is assigned to "1101" (4 bits).
Therefore, since "LDF HL" is 4 bits and "mn" is 12 bits, the total is 16 bits, or 2 bytes. Therefore, the code size of "LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h to 1DFFh)" is 2 bytes.

On the other hand, if the range of "mn" in the load command is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", particularly if the range of the second data area is specified, from "2600h" to "2FBEh", the following occurs:
Within the range of the second data area, the largest address value is "2FBEh", so
"2FBEh" - "1200h"
= 1 DBEh
=1/1101/1011/1110(B)
This results in 13 bits.
That is, when "1200h" is taken as the reference value "0" as described above, "2FBEh" can be expressed in 13 bits.
Therefore, when "LD HL" is coded, it is coded as 4 bits like the above "LDF HL", and "LD HL, mn" (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFFh) is expressed as "4 + 13 = 17 bits (3 bytes)".

Also, in the case of other load instructions such as "LD A, (HL)" mentioned above, the code size is set to 3 bytes in the same manner as above.
If the code size of "LD HL, mn" is 3 bytes, then "LD HL" does not necessarily have to be 4 bits. If it is 11 bits or less, since "mn" (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFFh) is 13 bits, it is possible to fit these together within 24 bits (3 bytes).

From the above, in the third embodiment, the code size of the load instruction is
LDF HL, mn (mn = 1200h to 1DFFh): 2 bytes (16 bits)
LD HL, mn (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFFh): 3 bytes (17 bits)
LD A, (HL) ("A" or "HL" is optional): 3 bytes.
As a result, the code size of "LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h to 1DFFh)" which specifies an address in the first data area and stores it in the HL register is one byte less than the code size of other load instructions, making it possible to conserve storage capacity in the first program area.

In particular, since the first program area stores programs related to the progress of the game, the capacity of the first program area is more likely to increase than programs stored in the second program area, in other words, programs not related to the progress of the game (programs related to the winning ratio monitor). For example, lottery processing related to the game, processing for shifting the game state, processing for driving the reels, and processing for granting game value (game media) according to the game result (the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state) are executed by the first program. Therefore, by reducing the code size of the load command that calls addresses "1200h" to "1DFFh" among the load commands stored in the first program area, it becomes possible to store more programs in the first program area.
On the other hand, among the programs stored in the second program area, the opcodes of the load instructions that specify addresses in the second data area are all unified as "LD". This makes it easier to check the validity of the program source in the programs stored in the second program area. In other words, it becomes possible to design programs that prioritize readability over reducing the program capacity (code size).

The data area of ROM 54 referenced by the second program is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh". Therefore, when specifying the address of the data area of ROM 54 referenced by the second program, "LD HL, mn" (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFF) is used.

There are multiple LD instructions (an instruction with LD as the opcode, also called the "first load instruction") as instructions constituting the first program, and there are multiple LDF instructions (an instruction with LDF as the opcode, also called the "second load instruction" or "special load instruction") as instructions constituting the first program, but there are no LDF instructions (an instruction with LDF as the opcode, also called the "second load instruction" or "special load instruction") as instructions constituting the second program.
The LD instruction can also be used to store 2-byte data in the HL register. However, storing 2-byte data in the HL register using the LDF instruction can reduce the code size. However, the LDF instruction has a limit on the range of the 2-byte data.

The above-mentioned LDF command and LD command are not only applicable to various processes in slot machines (for example, reel-type gaming machines under the Entertainment and Amusement Act), but can also be applied without problem to various general-purpose processes in pachinko gaming machines.
Pachinko gaming machines, like slot machines, are equipped with a first program area and a second program area, with the first program area storing programs related to the progress of the game and the second program area storing programs unrelated to the progress of the game (for example, a program relating to a base monitor that displays the base (which normally refers to a value calculated by "number of prize balls paid out / total number of balls dispensed x 100"; the same applies below). For this reason, the first program area tends to be larger in capacity than the second program area. Therefore, a capacity compression effect can be expected by adopting the LDF command in the program stored in the first program area.

In addition, the programs stored in the first program area in a pachinko game machine include, for example, a process related to a winning/losing lottery, a process related to control of stopping the fluctuation of special symbols, a process related to displaying special symbols or normal symbols, a process related to displaying game information (game status, error status, base, etc.), a process related to jackpot control, a process related to movement control of various movable objects (such as a big prize opening and an electric device that activates an opening extension function), a process related to payout control, etc. The LDF command can be used for these programs.
In particular, although there are differences in the process of calculating the display content between the display control of the base monitor of a pachinko game machine and the display control of the role ratio monitor of a slot machine, the display control is similar in that both ultimately display game information as data.
It is of course possible to use the LDF command in other processes controlled by the main CPU in both slot machines and pachinko games, without being limited to the above.

Let us return to the explanation given in FIG.
45B shows a CALLEX instruction, which is one of the call instructions.
When the "CALLEX mn" command is executed,
(1) Disable non-maskable interrupts (NMI) and maskable interrupts (INT) regardless of whether the interrupts are enabled or disabled at that time.
(2) Switch the register bank to "1",
(3) Call (invoke) the address specified by mn
To carry out the task.
In this embodiment, when a program in a first program area is to be executed from a program in a second program area, the program in the second program area can be executed by executing a CALLEX command.

In the above-mentioned load instruction, either an LDF instruction or an LD instruction is used depending on the range of mn, but in the call instruction of the third embodiment, a CALLEX instruction is used regardless of the range of mn. The CALLEX instruction is used when reading the second program from the first program.
Here, the second program area is in the range of addresses "2000h" to "25FFh" as shown in Fig. 42. In the CALLEX instruction, the code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" among the addresses "2000h" to "25FFh" is 2 bytes, and the code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling a range other than the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" is 4 bytes.

Here, the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" is "FFh", i.e., 1 byte. In this case, the code value of the address value "2000h" is set to "0h". This allows the code value when calling up the address value "20FFh" to be "FFh", so the code size of "mn" can be set to 1 byte regardless of when any address in the range of "2000h" to "20FFh" is called.
In addition, when encoding the opcode of "CALLEX", in the third embodiment, the code is set to "0100/1000", that is, 1 byte. This allows the code size of "CALLEX mn" (mn=2000h to 20FFh) to be set to 2 bytes.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing aspects of the CALLEX instruction.
In the figure, (A) shows "CALLEX 2000h". In this case, the code value corresponding to "2000h" is "0000/0000" as described above. Also, when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh", the code value of "CALLEX" is "0100/1000". Therefore, the code of "CALLEX 2000h" is:
0100/1000/0000/0000
It becomes.
When this command is executed, it calls the command at address "2000h" in the second program area.

Also, (B) in the figure shows "CALLEX 20FFh". In this case, the code value corresponding to "20FFh" is "1111/1111". Also, as described above, when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh", the code value of "CALLEX" is "0100/1000". Therefore, the code of "CALLEX 20FFh" is,
0100/1000/1111/1111
It becomes.
When this instruction is executed, it calls the instruction at address "20FFh" in the second program area.

Furthermore, (C) in the figure shows "CALLEX 2100h". Here, when "mn" changes from "20FFh" to "2100h", a carry occurs, and "mn" cannot be expressed in one byte, so the code size of "mn" becomes two bytes. When "mn" = "2100h", the code of "mn" is
0000/0001/0000/0000
It becomes.

Furthermore, the "CALLEX" code in this case is also different. When the "mn" range is "2000h" to "20FFh", the "CALLEX" code is 1 byte, but when the "mn" range is "2100h" to "25FFh", the "CALLEX" code is 2 bytes instead of 1 byte. As described above, when the opcode is composed of 1 byte, only 256 out of several thousand instructions are available. Therefore, when the "mn" range is "2000h" to "20FFh", a 1-byte code is assigned as the "CALLEX" code, but when the "mn" range is not "2000h" to "20FFh", a 2-byte code is assigned as the "CALLEX" code. In the example of FIG. 47, the "CALLEX" code in this case is as follows:
1010/0000/1000/0000
It states that:
Therefore, the code for "CALLEX mn" when "mn" = "2100h" is
1010/0000/1000/0000/0000/0001/0000/0000
It becomes.
When this command is executed, it calls the command at address "2100h" in the second program area.

Furthermore, (D) in the figure indicates "CALLEX 25FFh" (a command specifying the last address of the second program area). The maximum value when specifying an address in the second program area is "25FFh".
When the code for "2000h" is "0", "25FFh" is:
0000/0101/1111/1111
It becomes.
Therefore, the code for "CALLEX 25FFh" is:
1010/0000/1000/0000/0000/0101/1111/1111
It becomes.
When this instruction is executed, the instruction at address "25FFh" in the second program area is called.

As described above, in the “CALLEX mn” instruction of the third embodiment, if “mn” is in the range of “2000h” to “20FFh”, the instruction has a code size of 2 bytes, and if “mn” is outside the above range, the instruction has a code size of 4 bytes.
Therefore, if instructions that are called frequently are concentrated in the address range of "2000h" to "20FFh", the number of instructions that can be completed with a code size of 2 bytes increases accordingly. This makes it possible to save the storage capacity of the ROM 54 that stores the instructions.
Furthermore, by storing the address used when calling the second program from the first program in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh" within the address range "2000h" to "25FFh" in the second program area, it is possible to easily determine when the second program is a program called from the first program, when checking the second program.

Let us return to the explanation given in FIG.
45C shows a RETEX instruction, which corresponds to a conventional return instruction.
The RETEX command is
(1) The non-maskable interrupt (NMI) and the maskable interrupt (INT) are set to the state before the CALLEX instruction.
(2) Switch the register bank to "0",
(3) Return (RET) (return to the state before the CALLEX (the next instruction after the CALLEX (the program at the return address))
To carry out the task.
This makes it possible to execute the program in the first program area.
If the state when the CALLEX instruction is issued is an interrupt enabled state, the RETEX instruction puts the state into an interrupt enabled state. On the other hand, if the state when the CALLEX instruction is issued is an interrupt disabled state, the RETEX instruction puts the state into an interrupt disabled state.

In a conventional general call (CALL)/return (RET) instruction, a program is called by a call instruction, and after the program is executed, a return instruction is used to return to the state after the call instruction.
In contrast to this, in this embodiment, a program is called by a CALLEX instruction, and after the program is executed, a RETEX instruction is used to return to the state after the CALLEX instruction.
The above points will be explained in more detail below.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of a conventional CALL instruction and a RET instruction.
In this example, a second program is called while a first program is being executed.
When a second program is called while a first program is being executed, at least the following processing must be executed.
"1" Interrupt Management Processing In order to prevent the processing from becoming complicated, interrupt processing is prevented from being executed while the second program is being executed.
[2] SP Register Switching Process Since the stack area used in the second program is different from the stack area used in the first program, it is necessary to switch the SP register.
[3] Register Management Processing When a register is used during execution of the second program, it is necessary to take over the register value so as not to return to the first program.

In order to comply with the above, the program exemplified in FIG. 48 includes the following instructions:
First, when the second program is executed while the first program is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited. The interrupt prohibit instruction is the DI instruction in the figure. This is the instruction corresponding to "1" above. Note that the DI instruction, which is an interrupt prohibit instruction, is paired with the EI instruction, which is an interrupt enable instruction. Note that the DI instruction can prohibit maskable interrupt processing, but cannot prohibit non-maskable interrupt processing (NMI).

After executing the DI command, "PUSH AF" is executed to save the AF register. This command corresponds to the above "3". The PUSH command is an command to store data in the stack area. That is, the command to store the A register value and the F register value in the stack area is executed.
The next "CALL S_CHERR_CHK" command is a command to call "S_CHERR_CHK" (input/dispense sensor abnormality management), which is one of the second programs. In this example, "S_CHERR_CHK" is listed as the second program.
When this "S_CHERR_CHK" (second program) is finished, the "POP AF" instruction is used to restore the AF register that was saved. This instruction is used to call data from the stack area, and corresponds to "3" above. Next, the EI instruction is used to enable interrupt processing (corresponding to "1" above).

In "S_CHERR_CHK" (second program), "LD (_SB_STACK2), SP" is an instruction (corresponding to "2" above) to save (store) the SP register value for the first program to a specified address in the second stack area.
The next "LD SP, @STACK2" is an instruction to set the SP register for the second program (an instruction corresponding to the above "2").
Next, "PUSH GPR" and "PUSH QI" are executed to save the registers. Here, "GPR" indicates the type of register to be saved, and corresponds to the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers. Also, since "GPR" does not include the Q and I registers, "PUSH QI" is executed in addition to "PUSH GPR" to save the Q and I registers (the instruction corresponding to "3" above).

After the second program is executed, the registers and the SP register are restored. The Q and I registers are restored by "POP QI". Furthermore, the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are restored by "POP GPR" (these are the instructions corresponding to "3" above).
Next, the SP register is restored by "LD SP, (_SB_STACK2)" (the instruction corresponding to "2" above).
Then, RET is used to return to the state before the CALL instruction.

In this way, in a typical call/return instruction, the instructions corresponding to the above "1" to "3" are as follows in the first program:
D.I.
PUSH AF
POP AF
E.I.
needs to be done.
In addition, in the second program,
LD (), SP
PUSH GPR
PUSH QI
POP QI
POP GPR
LD SP, ()
needs to be done.

In contrast, as described above, the CALLEX instruction in this embodiment includes a process for inhibiting interrupts and a process for switching the register bank from 0 to 1. Therefore, a program in the second program area can be executed by a CALLEX instruction (one instruction), and there is no need to provide an interrupt inhibition instruction (DI instruction) or a register save instruction (PUSH instruction) separately.
The RETEX instruction also includes a process for returning the interrupt to the state before the CALLEX instruction, and a process for switching the register bank from 1 to 0. Therefore, the RETEX instruction (one instruction) can return to the program in the first program area, and there is no need to separately provide an interrupt enable instruction (EI instruction) for returning the interrupt to the original state, or an instruction for restoring the register (POP instruction).
This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity.

Furthermore, the CALLEX and RETEX instructions make it possible to return to the interrupt state of the first program immediately prior to the execution of the second program.
Therefore, if the state immediately before the CALLEX instruction is an interrupt-enabled state, after the second program has been executed, the RETEX instruction can be used to return to the first program in the interrupt-enabled state.
On the other hand, if the state immediately before the CALLEX instruction is an interrupt disabled state, after the second program is executed, it is possible to return to the first program in an interrupt disabled state by the RETEX instruction.

Furthermore, when a CALLEX instruction is executed, the register bank is switched from 0 to 1. Furthermore, when a RETEX instruction is executed, the register bank is switched from 1 to 0.
Therefore, when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F registers of the register banks 0 and 1 is updated from "0" to "1." Also, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F registers of the register banks 0 and 1 is updated from "1" to "0."
When the CALLEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F register of either register bank 0 or 1 may be updated from "0" to "1."

Furthermore, the data stored in each register of register banks 0 and 1, except for the D3 bit of the F register, is not updated by the CALLEX and RETEX instructions themselves.
This point will be explained with a concrete example.
In the following description, the A, B, H, and L registers of register bank 0 are referred to as the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers, respectively.
Moreover, the A, B, H, and L registers of register bank 1 are referred to as 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers, respectively.
Assume that the following data is currently stored in each register of register banks 0 and 1.
0A register: 00000001 (B)
0B register: 00000000 (B)
0H register: 11110001 (B)
0L register: 00000001 (B)
1A register: 00000000 (B)
1B register: 00000011 (B)
1H register: 11110010 (B)
1L register: 00000001 (B)

In this state, when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the state switches from using the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers to using the 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers. The register values of the 0A, 0B, 0H, 0L, 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers do not change immediately before and after the CALLEX instruction. As mentioned above, only the D3 bit of the F register is updated.
Next, execution of the second program uses the 1A, 1H, and 1L registers, e.g.
1A register: 00000011 (B)
1B register: 00000011 (B)
1H register: 11110001 (B)
1L register: 00000000 (B)
Let us assume that the following occurs:

Then, when the RETEX command is executed based on the end of the second program, the values of the 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers remain unchanged, and the state switches to a state in which the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers are used. At this point, the values of the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers are the values immediately before the CALLEX command, that is,
0A register: 00000001 (B)
0B register: 00000000 (B)
0H register: 11110001 (B)
0L register: 00000001 (B)
It is.
Note that the 0H register value is the value it had immediately before the CALLEX instruction, and has not been replaced with the 1H register value.
Then, when the first program is executed to add "1" to the value of the OA register,
0A register: 00000010 (B)
It becomes.

From the above, if we focus on a special register (for example, the A register), if the special register value immediately before the CALLEX instruction is "x", the special register value will become "y" when the CALLEX instruction is executed. This is because the special register value does not change due to the CALLEX instruction, but because the special register being used has changed from the special register in register bank 0 to the special register in register bank 1.

Let us now assume that the program in the second program area is executed, causing the special register to be used and the special register value to be updated from "y" to "y'". After that, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the special register to be used switches from the special register in register bank 1 to the special register in register bank 0. Therefore, the special register value immediately after the RETEX instruction becomes the value it had immediately before the CALLEX instruction, i.e., "x". Note that even immediately after the RETEX instruction, the special register value in register bank 1 remains "y'".

Specifically, the above-mentioned CALLEX instruction and RETEX instruction are used, for example, as follows.
Fig. 49 is a flow chart showing a program start (M_PRG_START) in the third embodiment. In Fig. 49, step numbers specific to the third embodiment are underlined.
Program start (M_PRG_START) is a program of the main control board 50 that is executed first after power is turned on, and determines whether the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are met, whether there are any power interruption recovery abnormalities, etc.
If it is determined that a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred, the flow proceeds to an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 or an initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.
If it is determined that the mode can be changed to the setting change mode, the process proceeds to the initialization process in step S2731, and after this initialization process, the mode can be changed to the setting change mode.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting change mode has not been entered and that there is no power interruption recovery abnormality, the process proceeds to power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721.

In FIG. 49, when the program start (M_PRG_START) process is started, first in step S2851, an initial value is set in the SP register of register bank 0. When power is turned on, the SP register value of register bank 0 is "0". Here, the command "LD SP, F200h" is used to store "F200h" in the SP register of register bank 0.

The value "F200h" stored here is the last address of the first stack area plus "1", as shown in Figure 44. When the SP register value of register bank 0 is "F200h", this indicates that data is stored (pile) in "F1FFh".
Secondly, in step S2851, "CALLEX 2000h" is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the start address of the RWM checksum calculation command in step S2852 is "2000h".
Next, the process proceeds to step S2852, where the second program (RWM checksum calculation) is started based on "CALLEX 2000h." When the second program is started for the first time after power-on, an initial value is set in the SP register of register bank 1. When power is turned on, the SP register value of register bank 1 is "0." Here, "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1 by the command "LD SP, F400h."

The value "F400h" stored here is the last address "F3FFh" of the second stack area plus "1" as shown in Fig. 44. When the SP register value of register bank 1 is "F400h", this indicates that data is to be stored (pile) in "F3FFh".
Furthermore, when the RWM checksum calculation is completed, RETEX is executed, and the program (instruction) in the first program is returned to after the CALLEX in step S2851 (S2705). Then, the process proceeds to step S2075 and subsequent steps. The description of the process from step S2705 onward is omitted.
As described above, in the third embodiment, since the CALLEX instruction is an instruction including register saving, there is no need to define separate register saving instructions ("PUSH AF", "PUSH GPR", and "PUSH QI"). Similarly, since the RETEX instruction is an instruction including register restoring, there is no need to define separate register restoring instructions ("POP AF", "POP GPR", and "POP QI").

Furthermore, after storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 when the second program is executed for the first time after power-on (step S2852), when returning to the first program and executing the second program again, there is no need to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 again.
In other words, starting from when the power is turned on, the first time the second program is executed, a process (instruction) is executed to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1, but the second program is executed thereafter without having to execute the process (instruction) to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the second program.

However, without being limited thereto, a process (instruction) may be executed to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 each time the second program is executed. Alternatively, a process (instruction) may be executed to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 when a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second program.
Assume that the first time the second program is executed after power-on, the initial value "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1, and the second program is executed. If data is stored in the second stack area during execution of the second program, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated.

As described above, for example, when two bytes of data are first stored in the second stack area, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated from "F400h" to "F3FEh". After that, the data is usually returned from the second stack area before the second program is terminated. Therefore, when the second program is terminated, the SP register value of register bank 1 is usually "F400h".
When the second program ends and the program returns to the first program, the SP register of register bank 0 is used. The SP register value of register bank 0 maintains the value it had immediately before the program started. For example, if the SP register value of register bank 0 was "F1FDh" immediately before the program started, the SP register value of register bank 0 will be "F1FDh" when the program ends and the program returns to the first program.

Next, a method of using the CALLEX command (application example) will be described.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example in which a CALLEX instruction and a JR instruction (jump instruction) are used.
As mentioned above, the CALLEX instruction can be a two-byte instruction if the address range to be called is from "2000h" to "20FFh". Therefore, when calling a second program from a first program, the more the CALLEX instruction is used, the more memory capacity required for the instructions can be saved.

For example, if a "CALLEX 2000h" instruction is provided and executed, the program stored at address "2000h" is called, but if the description (storage) of that program starts at address "2000h" and that program occupies most of the addresses "2000h" to "20FDh", then it will be impossible to provide many CALLEX instructions. In the extreme, if a program starts at address "2000h" and continues to address "20FFh", in other words, if there is only one program in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", then only one 2-byte CALLEX instruction can be provided.

Therefore, in the example of Figure 50, a JR (jump) instruction is placed in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", the destination to which the JR instruction jumps is specified outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", and the actual program is stored at the destination to which the JR instruction jumps.
For example, "JR 2200h" is stored at address "2000h". Incidentally, the instruction "JR 2200h" means to jump to address "2200h". Thus, when "CALLEX 2000h" is executed, address "2000h" is called, but since "JR 2200h" is stored at address "2000h", a jump to address "2200h" is also performed. If an actual program ("Program A" in FIG. 50) is stored at address "2200h" or later, the actual program (Program A) can be placed outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh".

In this embodiment, the code size required for the "JR mn (mn=2000h to 20FFh)" instruction is 3 bytes.
2000h JR mn1 (in the example of FIG. 50, mn1=2200h)
2003h JR mn2 (in the example of FIG. 50, mn2=2250h)
2006h JR mn3 (in the example of FIG. 50, mn3=22A0h)
:
As shown above, JR instructions are placed in 3-byte increments.

However, this is not limiting, and if the code size required for the "JR mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" instruction can be configured from 2 bytes,
2000h JR mn1
2002h JR mn2
2004h JR mn3
:
It becomes.
Also, if the code size required for the "JR mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" instruction is 4 bytes,
2000h JR mn1
2004h JR mn2
2008h JR mn3
:
It becomes.

In the example of Figure 50, if taken to the extreme, it would be possible to place JR instructions in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". In this case,
(1) 2000h JR mn1
(2) 2003h JR mn2
(3) 2006h JR mn3
:
(84)20F9h JR mn84
(85) 20FCh JR mn85
(86)20FFh JR mn86
Therefore, a total of 86 JR instructions, each consisting of 3 bytes, can be stored within the address range from "2000h" to "20FFh."

In the example of FIG.
2000h JR 2200h
The actual program (program A) at address "2000h" was stored within the range of addresses "2200h" to "224Fh."
Also,
2003h JR 2250h
The actual program (program B) at address "2003h" was stored within the range of addresses "2250h" to "229Fh".

Furthermore,
2006h JR 22A0h
The actual program (program C) at address "2006h" is stored at address "22A0h" and onward.
In this way, it is desirable to store almost no actual program to be executed by the CALLEX instruction in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh" of the CALLEX instruction, which allows a code size of 2 bytes. In other words, the address of the second program called by the CALLEX instruction is stored in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh". However, as will be described later, the JR instruction does not need to be used for the second program called by the CALLEX instruction and that is closest to the address "20FFh" in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh". In this way, if the majority (including "almost" or "all") of the instructions of the second program called by the CALLEX instruction use the JR instruction and the actual program is stored at address "2100h" or later, the second program area can be used efficiently.

For example, if there are only ten CALLEX instructions, the JR instruction is stored in the addresses corresponding to the first through ninth CALLEX instructions, but the actual program may be directly stored in the address corresponding to the tenth CALLEX instruction without using the JR instruction.
On the other hand, regardless of the number of CALLEX instructions, it may be determined that only JR instructions are stored in the address range from "2000h" to "20FFh", and even if the number of JR instructions (CALLEX instructions) is significantly less than the upper limit of 86, the memory area before address "20FFh" may be left free as a spare.

As described above, the CALLEX instruction has a code size of 2 bytes when calling within the address range of "2000h" to "20FFh", and a code size of 4 bytes when calling outside the address range of "2000h" to "20FFh".
Therefore, the total is 5 bytes for the "2-byte CALLEX instruction + 3-byte JR instruction", which is larger than the code size (4 bytes) of the CALLEX instruction that calls an address outside the range of "2000h" to "20FFh".

However, in the case of chips for gaming machines that comply with the Entertainment and Amusement Act regulations (such as reel gaming machines and pachinko gaming machines), the first program area has no spare memory capacity, but the second program area has spare memory capacity.
Therefore, even if the JR instruction stored in the second program area increases by 3 bytes, it is more advantageous in terms of efficient use of the first program area to keep the code size of the CALLEX instruction stored in the first program area to 2 bytes.

Also, toward the end approaching address "20FFh", the program itself may be stored without providing a JR instruction.
As described above, if 3-byte JR instructions are sequentially placed after address "2000h", the instruction "JR mn86" will be stored at address "20FFh". In this case, the instruction "JR mn86" is stored in the 3-byte memory area from address "20FFh" to "2101h".

However, storing the JR instruction in the 3-byte memory area after address "20FFh" and storing the actual program for that instruction in another memory area will save memory capacity by storing the program directly from address "20FFh".
For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the JR instruction is not placed at address "20FFh", and a program (program D) is stored starting from address "20FFh".
As a result, when "CALLEX 20FFh" is executed, program D stored at address "20FFh" and after will be executed.

Although the above example uses address "20FFh", the same applies to cases where the JR instruction is placed at address "20FDh" or "20FEh".
Specifically, in terms of saving memory capacity, it is preferable to store the JR instruction in the 3-byte memory area from address "20FDh" to "20FFh" and store the program directly at address "20FDh" and after, rather than storing the program in another memory area.
Similarly, it is preferable in terms of saving memory capacity to store the program directly at addresses after "20FEh" rather than storing the JR instruction in the 3-byte memory area from address "20FEh" to "2100h" and storing the program in other memory areas.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In Fig. 42, the ROM 54 has a program management area and an unused area, but this is not limiting, and the ROM 54 may have at least a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area. In addition, while Fig. 42 shows the start address and end address for each of these storage areas, the storage capacity shown in Fig. 42 is only an example and is not limited to this. Therefore, the start address and end address of each storage area shown in Fig. 42 are only an example and can be set arbitrarily.

Therefore, in the example of Figure 42, since the address range of the second program area is "2000h" to "25FFh", "2000h" to "20FFh" is exemplified as the address range in which the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be 2 bytes; however, if the address range of the second program area changes, the address range in which the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be 2 bytes also changes.
For example, if the address range of the second program area is "2150h" to "264Fh", the address range in which the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be set to 2 bytes is "2150h" to "224Fh".

(2) In the example of Fig. 42, the first program area, the first data area, the second program area, and the second data area are arranged in this order in ROM 54, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the second program area and the second data area may be arranged before the first program area and the first data area. Also, a predetermined management area or the like may be arranged at the top address of ROM 54 (before the first program area in Fig. 42).
Similarly, the RWM 53 is not limited to being arranged in the order of the work area and the stack area, and may be arranged in the order of the stack area and the work area. Also, although the first work area, the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area are arranged in this order, this is not limited, and for example, the second work area and the second stack area may be arranged before the first work area and the first stack area. Furthermore, a predetermined management area or the like may be arranged at the top address of the RWM 53 (before the first work area in FIG. 42).

(3) In the built-in register area, each register bank is provided with a main register and a sub-register, but this is not limiting and any register bank may be used as long as it has at least a main register.
(4) In Fig. 43, the register bank monitor is assigned to the D3 bit of the F register, but this is not limited to this and it may be assigned to any bit. For example, if the second zero flag is not used, it may be assigned to the D5 bit.
Also, rather than assigning the register bank monitor to a specific bit in the F register, it is possible to provide a register dedicated to the register bank monitor.

(5) In the example of FIG. 42, the address range of the first data area is from "1200h" to "1DF3h," and it has been explained that within this range the range of "mn" can be expressed in 12 bits.
Where:
1200h=0000/0000/0000(B)
When
1111/1111/1111(B) = FFFh
It is.
and,
1200h+FFFh=21FFh
It is.
Therefore, if the range of the first data area is within the range of "1200h" to "21FFh", the range of "mn" can be expressed in 12 bits, and the code size of "LDF HL, mn" can be configured as 2 bytes.

(6) The address ranges and sizes of the first stack area and second stack area shown in FIG. 42 are examples and are not limited to these. For example, if the range of the first stack area is addresses "F1D0h" to "F2FFh", then in step S2851 of FIG. 49, it will be "LD SP, F300h".

(7) The third embodiment can be applied not only to medalless gaming machines, but also to slot machines and pachinko machines under the Entertainment and Amusement Act. Furthermore, it can be applied to Parrot and casino machines that use game balls.
(8) The first to third embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to third embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Fourth Embodiment
The gaming machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is a medal-less gaming machine (a managed gaming machine, an enclosed gaming machine) similar to the first and second embodiments.
In the fourth embodiment, a one-chip microprocessor 500 provided on a main control board 50 executes control including control of the number of game media.
In the fourth embodiment, the CALLEX instruction, the RETEX instruction, the register bank, and the like described in the third embodiment are used.
FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing a gaming machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 29 (second embodiment).
29, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment includes a game media number control board 100 in addition to the main control board 50. In contrast, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment does not include the game media number control board 100.

In FIG. 51, a one-chip microprocessor 500 is provided on the main control board 50. The one-chip microprocessor 500 has a CPU (microprocessor, referred to as the "main CPU 501" in FIG. 51), a ROM (read-on-memory), and a RWM (read-write memory) all integrated into a single chip, blocking unauthorized access from outside and ensuring high security.

In FIG. 51, the main CPU 501 corresponds to the "first main control CPU 55" in FIG. 29 (second embodiment). Here, the first main control CPU 55 in FIG. 29 did not execute control regarding the number of gaming media. In the second embodiment, control regarding the number of gaming media was executed by the second main control CPU 105 provided on the gaming media number control board 100.

In contrast, in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the game media number control board 100, i.e., the second main control CPU 105, is not provided. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 501 executes control related to the number of game media. Note that the main CPU 501, like the CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the other embodiments (the main CPU 55 in the first embodiment, the first main control CPU 55 in the second embodiment), naturally performs control related to the progress of the game (reel drive control, role selection, etc.) and other controls (output control of test signals to the test machine, display control of the role ratio monitor 113, etc.).

In Figure 51, the main control ROM 502 is a storage means for storing programs and data for controlling the progress of the game, and the main control RWM 503 is a storage means for temporarily storing data when controlling the progress of the game.
Furthermore, the game media number control ROM 502 is a storage means for storing programs and data for controlling the number of game media (calculating the number of game media awarded, processing the awarding of game media, etc.), and the game media number control RWM 503 is a storage means for temporarily storing data when controlling the number of game media.

"Control of the number of gaming media" means
(1) Control for sending game media (medals, etc.) that have been lent or won by winning to a tray (when the game media (medals) are tangible objects);
Or,
(2) Control for transmitting a signal indicating the number of game media lent or won by winning to a game media number display device (game ball number display device or medal number display device) (when game media (medals) are intangible assets)
This refers to.
The programs stored in the game media number control ROM 504, and the data stored in the game media number control ROM 504 and the game media number control RWM 505 are provided only for the purpose of controlling the number of game media, and do not perform any control other than controlling the number of game media.

Note that "game media number control" may also be referred to as "medal number control." In this case, it is referred to as "medal number control ROM" or "medal number control RWM." However, as explained in the second embodiment, medalless gaming machines do not use medals as tangible objects. Therefore, "medals" in medalless gaming machines refer to gaming media (game value) used for gaming. Therefore, when referring to "medals," it may refer to medals (game medals) used in slot-type gaming machines under the current Entertainment and Amusement Act, or medals as intangible objects (for example, electronic data). Note that medals as intangible objects may be referred to as game media, game value, points (or simply "points"), electronic medals, electronic data, electronic information, electronic gaming media, electronic gaming value, etc.

Furthermore, the "game media" in the "game media number control" includes the game media (game balls) used in pachinko gaming machines under the Entertainment and Amusement Act. In other words, the "game media number control" in the fourth embodiment is of course applicable to pachinko gaming machines.

Current Entertainment and Amusement Business Act regulations stipulate that "the total number of ROMs and RWMs installed on main control board 50 must not exceed one each across all main boards (excluding those stipulated in the control of the number of gaming media)."
Furthermore, it is stipulated that "the total number of ROMs and RWMs mounted on the main control board 50 for controlling the number of gaming media must not exceed one each across all main boards."
Therefore,
Main control ROM 502: 1 unit, main control RWM 503: 1 unit, game media number control ROM 504: 1 unit, game media number control RWM 505: 1 unit.
It should be noted that the above four storage means are not meant to be physically separate, but are provided within a single built-in memory, as will be described later.

The outside-of-use ROM 506 is a storage means for storing programs or data other than those stored in the inside-use ROM, and the outside-of-use RWM 507 is a storage means for storing data other than those stored in the inside-use RWM.
Here, "outside the area of use" refers to a storage area used for the purpose of controlling the output of signals necessary for testing the gaming machine 10 and preventing fraud. Furthermore, programs and data "used for the purpose of preventing fraud" include, for example, programs and data necessary for display control of the winning ratio monitor 113. Programs and data placed in the ROM or RWM outside the area of use must not impair the fairness of the game.
It should be noted that the area other than the "area of use" is referred to as the "outside area of use", and the "area of use" is also referred to as the "inside area of use".
Therefore, the main control ROM 502 and the game media number control ROM 504 are ROMs within the used area.
In addition, the main control RWM 503 and the game media count control RWM 505 are RWMs within the usage area.

The main control ROM 502, main control RWM 503, game media count control ROM 504, game media count control RWM 505, outside-usage-area ROM 506, and outside-usage-area RWM 507 are provided as built-in memories within the one-chip microprocessor 500. As will be described in detail later, these ROMs and RWMs are arranged in a predetermined order in the order of addresses.
In other words, within the built-in memory, a main control ROM 502, a main control RWM 503, a game media number control ROM 504, a game media number control RWM 505, an outside used area ROM 506, and an outside used area RWM 507 are each divided and arranged.
However, the main control ROM 502, the game media count control ROM 504, and the outside use area ROM 506 are each located in an area that is explicitly separated.
Similarly, the main control RWM 503, the game media count control RWM 505, and the outside-usage-area RWM 507 are each placed in an explicitly divided area.

In the fourth embodiment, since the game media number control board 100 as in the second embodiment is not provided, the total game media number clear switch 112 and the role ratio monitor 113 provided on the game media number control board 100 in the second embodiment are provided on the main control board 50. As described above, the control for displaying a predetermined ratio on the role ratio monitor 113 is executed based on the program and data stored in the out-of-use area ROM 506 and the out-of-use area RWM 507. The total game media number clear switch 112 may be directly provided on the main control board 50, or may be electrically connected to the main control board 50 (for example, the board on which the total game media number clear switch 112 is mounted is electrically connected to the main control board 50).
In addition, the game media number display board (game media number display device) 120 is electrically connected to the game media number control board 100 in the second embodiment, but is electrically connected to the main control board 50 in the fourth embodiment. Control for displaying the number of game media on the game media number display unit 121 is executed based on programs and data stored in the game media number control ROM 504 and the game media number control RWM 505.

The counting switch 47 is electrically connected to the game media number control board 100 in the second embodiment, but is electrically connected to the main control board 50 in the fourth embodiment.
The connection terminal board 130 is electrically connected to the game media number control board 100 in the second embodiment, but is electrically connected to the main control board 50 in the fourth embodiment.
29 of the second embodiment illustrates the sub-control RWM 83, sub-control ROM 84, and sub-control CPU 85 of the sub-control board 80, which are built into the one-chip microprocessor of the sub-control board 80, similar to the main control board 50. For this reason, in FIG. 51, the one-chip microprocessor 80a of the sub-control board 80 is illustrated, similar to the one-chip microprocessor 500 of the main control board 50.

Fig. 52 is a diagram showing a memory map of the built-in memory (ROM, RWM, etc.) provided in the one-chip microprocessor 500 of the main control board 50. Fig. 52 shows only the part of the built-in memory that is related to this embodiment, and does not show all of the built-in memory.
In the third embodiment, the "program area" in FIG. 42 and the "control area" in FIG. 52 etc. are called differently, but have the same function.

52, the main control ROM 502 and the game media number control ROM 504 are used area ROMs, and in addition to these, there is provided an outside-area ROM 506. Similarly, the main control RWM 503 and the game media number control RWM 505 are used area RWMs, and in addition to these, there is provided an outside-area RWM 507.
The main control ROM 502 and the number of game media control ROM 504 are ROMs in the usage area, and therefore correspond to areas for storing programs and data related to the progress of the game (including control of the number of game media). In contrast, the non-usage area ROM 506 is a ROM outside the usage area, and therefore corresponds to an area for storing programs and data not related to the progress of the game. In particular, in this embodiment, the non-usage area ROM 506 corresponds to a memory area for storing programs and data related to the display control of the role ratio monitor 113, and a memory area for storing programs and data related to the output control of the test signal.

Each of the storage areas of the main control ROM 502, the game media number control ROM 504, and the outside area ROM 506 includes a control area and a data area.
Here, the "data area" refers to a storage area in which only information other than programs is stored or will be stored.
In the fourth embodiment, the memory area related to main control is referred to as "area 1", the memory area related to game media count control is referred to as "area 2", and the memory area outside the used area is referred to as "area 3".

The ROM has at least an address range of "0000h" to "2FFFh" and a storage area of 16K bytes or less. Within this storage area, the control area 1 of the main control ROM 502 is set to 4.5K bytes or less, and the data area 1 is set to 3.0K bytes or less.
The storage area of the game media number control ROM 504 is set to a total of 2.5K bytes or less for the control area 2 and data area 2.

Furthermore, during RWM, RWM area 1, which is the memory area of the main control RWM 503, is a memory area used (updated, referenced) during execution of a program (program related to the progress of the game) stored in control area 1. Similarly, RWM area 2, which is the memory area of the game media count control RWM 505, is a memory area used (updated, referenced) during execution of a program (program related to control of the number of game media) stored in control area 2. Furthermore, RWM area 3, which is the memory area of the outside use area RWM 507, is a memory area used (updated, referenced) during execution of a program stored in control area 3.
The RWM area is set to 1024K bytes or less as a whole. Furthermore, RWM area 1 and RWM area 2 are each set to 512K bytes or less.

An unused area may be interposed between the main control ROM 502, the game media number control ROM 504, and the ROM outside the used area 506 (example of Figure 52), or the main control ROM 502, the game media number control ROM 504, and the ROM outside the used area 506 may be arranged at consecutive addresses.
Similarly, the main control RWM 503, the game media number control RWM 505, and the RWM outside the area in use 507 may be arranged at consecutive addresses (example of Figure 52), or unused areas or the like may be interposed between the main control RWM 503, the game media number control RWM 505, and the RWM outside the area in use 507.

The built-in memory also has one built-in register area. This built-in register area further has register bank 0 and register bank 1. Register bank 0 and register bank 1 are similar to register bank 0 and register bank 1 described in Figure 42 (third embodiment), and each register bank has various registers (see Figure 42 (B)).

As will be described in more detail below, each register in register bank 0 or register bank 1 is used when a program stored in either control area 1, control area 2, or control area 3 is being executed.
Specifically, for example, the allocation can be as follows:
(1) Pattern 1
Register bank 0: Used when executing a program stored in control area 1. Register bank 1: Used when executing programs stored in control area 2 and control area 3. (2) Pattern 2
Register bank 0: Used when the programs stored in control area 1 and control area 2 are being executed. Register bank 1: Used when the program stored in control area 3 is being executed.

(3) Pattern 3
Register bank 0: Used when the programs stored in control area 1 and control area 3 are being executed. Register bank 1: Used when the program stored in control area 2 is being executed. (4) Other patterns In this embodiment, two register banks are provided. However, for example, three register banks (one for each control area) may be provided,
It is also possible to configure the following: Register bank 0: Used when a program stored in control area 1 is being executed; Register bank 1: Used when a program stored in control area 2 is being executed; Register bank 2: Used when a program stored in control area 3 is being executed.

52, RWM area 1, RWM area 2, and RWM area 3 are provided with their own stack area 1, stack area 2, and stack area 3, respectively. The program in main control ROM 502 uses stack area 1, the program in number of game media control ROM 504 uses stack area 2, and the program in outside used area ROM 506 uses stack area 3. The programs in main control ROM 502, number of game media control ROM 504, and outside used area ROM 506 are configured not to share stack areas. Specifically, for example, stack area 1 is not shared between the program in main control ROM 502 and the program in number of game media control ROM 504.
Furthermore, the programs in the main control ROM 502, the game media count control ROM 504, and the programs in the outside area used ROM 506 are all configured not to use stack areas other than the corresponding stack areas (for example, stack area 1 in the program in the main control ROM 502). Specifically, for example, the program in the main control ROM 502 will not use stack area 3.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment,
(1) "Control Area 1" and "Data Area 1" refer to the storage areas of the main control ROM 502 (usage area),
(2) “Control Area 2” and “Data Area 2” refer to the storage areas of the game media count control ROM 504 (usage area).
(3) “Control Area 3” and “Data Area 3” refer to storage areas of ROM 506 outside the area in use,
(4) "RWM area 1" refers to the memory area of the main control RWM 503 (usage area), and "stack area 1" refers to the stack area of RWM area 1.
(5) "RWM area 2" refers to the memory area of the game media count control RWM 505 (usage area), and "stack area 2" refers to the stack area of RWM area 2.
(6) “RWM area 3” refers to the memory area of RWM 507 outside the area in use, and “stack area 3” refers to the stack area of RWM area 3.

FIG. 53 shows examples of division into the main control area, the game media count control area, and the area outside the use area, where (A) shows example 1 and (B) shows example 2.
In Example 1 in FIG. 1A, no outside use area is provided within the main control area. In other words, an outside use area is provided outside the main control area and the game media count control area.
In this case,
(1) Main control area: Includes memory areas (main control ROM 502 and main control RWM 503) for storing programs and data related to the progress of the game, but does not include memory areas (outside use area ROM 506 and outside use area RWM 507) used for the purpose of controlling the output of signals necessary for testing the gaming machine 10 and preventing fraud.
(2) Game Media Number Control Area A storage area for storing programs and data related to control of the number of game media (game media number control ROM 504, game media number control RWM 505)
(3) Outside the Use Area: A storage area used for controlling the output of signals necessary for testing the gaming machine 10 and for preventing fraud (a ROM outside the use area 506 and a RWM outside the use area 507).
It becomes.

Also, in Example 2 in the figure (B), a use area and an outside use area are provided in the main control area. Note that the game media number control area is only a use area and does not have an outside use area. This is because, as described above, the game media number control area is a storage area that stores programs and data for executing only control related to the number of game media. Furthermore, there is no outside use area outside the main control area and the game media number control area.
In this case,
(1) Main control area: A storage area for storing programs and data related to the progress of a game (main control ROM 502 and main control RWM 503), and a storage area used for the purpose of controlling the output of signals required for testing the gaming machine 10 and preventing fraud (outside use area ROM 506 and outside use area RWM 507).
(2) Game Media Number Control Area A storage area for storing programs and data related to control of the number of game media (game media number control ROM 504, game media number control RWM 505)
It becomes.

Fig. 54 is a diagram showing communication between the main control area (usage area, non-usage area) and the game media count control area. In the example of Fig. 54, the storage area is divided according to Example 2 of Fig. 53 (B). That is, the main control area includes a usage area and a non-usage area.
Program execution in one main CPU 501 of one-chip microprocessor 500 mounted on main control board 50 is mainly the program in control area 1 of main control ROM 502. Also, programs in the used area of game media number control ROM 504 and the area of outside used area ROM 506 are executed by calling a predetermined address (in other words, "statically") from the program in control area 1 of main control ROM 502. The program list at that time is configured so that the called address is clearly written.
In addition, the programs in the game media number control ROM 504 and the programs in the outside used area ROM 506 are modularized by function, and are configured so that when called by the program in the main control ROM 502, all registers used in the program in the main control ROM 502 ("all registers" refers to multiple registers, and is therefore also referred to as "multiple registers"; the same applies below) are protected. The following methods can be used to protect all registers.

(1) First Method The register bank used by the program in main control ROM 502 is made different from the register bank used by the program in number of game media control ROM 504 and the program in outside area of use ROM 506. In other words, when the program in main control ROM 502 calls the program in number of game media control ROM 504 or the program in outside area of use ROM 506 and executes the program in number of game media control ROM 504 or the program in outside area of use ROM 506, the register bank is switched.

(2) Second Method The register bank used by the program in main control ROM 502 is made the same as the register bank used by the program in number of game media control ROM 504 or the program in outside area used ROM 506. In this case, when the program in main control ROM 502 calls and executes the program in number of game media control ROM 504 or the program in outside area used ROM 506, a command to save all registers is executed.
The program for protecting all registers will be described later.

In the usage area of the main control area, the programs stored in the control area 1 can refer to the data stored in the data area 1. In addition, the programs stored in the control area 1 can refer to and update the data stored in the RWM area 1.
Similarly, the programs stored in the control area 2 can refer to the data stored in the data area 2, and can refer to and update the data stored in the RWM area 2.
Furthermore, the programs stored in the control area 3 can refer to the data stored in the data area 3, and can refer to and update the data stored in the RWM area 3.

On the other hand, the program in control area 1 can call a program in control area 2, and can call a program in control area 3. Specifically, based on a CALLEX or CALL instruction in the program in control area 1, it is possible to call and execute a program in control area 2. Also, based on a RETEX or RET instruction in the program in control area 2, after the program in control area 2 is executed, it is possible to return to immediately after the CALLEX or CALL instruction in the program in control area 1.
Similarly, it is possible to call and execute a program in control area 3 based on a CALLEX or CALL instruction in the program in control area 1. Also, based on a RETEX or RET instruction in the program in control area 3, after the program in control area 3 is executed, it is possible to return to just after the CALLEX or CALL instruction in the program in control area 1.

In contrast, the system is configured so that a program in control area 2 cannot call a program (subroutine) in control area 1, and a program in control area 2 cannot call a program (subroutine) in control area 3. If it were possible to call a program (subroutine) in control area 1 or control area 3 from a program in control area 2, the program configuration would become complicated. Also, this would be risky as it would deviate from the purpose of setting an upper limit on the storage capacity of main control ROM 502 and game media number control ROM 504.

Similarly, it is configured so that a program in control area 3 cannot call a program (subroutine) in control area 1, and a program in control area 3 cannot call a program (subroutine) in control area 2. If it were possible to call a program (subroutine) in control area 1 or control area 2 from a program in control area 3, the program configuration would become complicated. Also, it is likely to deviate from the purpose of setting an upper limit on the storage capacity of main control ROM 502 and game media number control ROM 504.

Furthermore, the program in control area 1 cannot directly reference the data in data area 2. In this case, the program in control area 1 calls the program in control area 2, and the program in control area 2 references the data in data area 2.
Similarly, the program in control area 1 cannot directly reference the data in data area 3. In this case, the program in control area 1 calls the program in control area 3, and the program in control area 3 references the data in data area 3.

Furthermore, the program in the control area 1 is configured such that the data in the RWM area 2 cannot be updated, but the data in the RWM area 2 can be referenced.
Similarly, the data in the RWM area 1 cannot be updated by the program in the control area 2, but the data in the RWM area 1 can be referenced.
Further, the program in the control area 1 cannot update the data in the RWM area 3, but can refer to the data in the RWM area 3.
Similarly, the program in the control area 3 cannot update the data in the RWM area 1, but can refer to the data in the RWM area 1.

Furthermore, the data in the RWM area 3 cannot be updated by the program in the control area 2, but the data in the RWM area 3 can be referenced.
Similarly, the program in the control area 3 cannot update the data in the RWM area 2, but can refer to the data in the RWM area 2.

As described above, the data in the RWM area "M"("M" is any other than "N") cannot be updated (but can be referenced) by the program in the control area "N"("N" is either "1,""2," or "3").
If it were possible to update the data in RWM area "M" using a program in control area "N", this would deviate from the purpose of setting the upper limit of the capacity of RWM area 1 and RWM area 2 at "512K" bytes, as shown in FIG. 52.

In addition, to reduce the amount of program usage in control area 1, control area 2 or control area 3 is configured not to have common general-purpose subroutines. If general-purpose subroutines that can be used by programs in control area 1 were provided in control area 2 or control area 3, programs that should be stored in control area 1 would essentially be able to be stored in control area 2 or control area 3, which would deviate from the purpose of setting an upper limit on the storage capacity of control area 1 (4.5K bytes or less).

Furthermore, each program module in control area 1, control area 2, and control area 3 is always called in the form of a subroutine, and after the subroutine ends, the RETEX or RET command is used to return to the program immediately after it was called. Furthermore, one module is provided for each purpose. This configuration clarifies the program structure.
The term "module" refers to a group of programs for a specific purpose.
Moreover, a "subroutine" refers to a group of programs that is called from a main routine by a CALLEX instruction, CALL instruction, etc., and always returns to immediately after the call by a RETEX instruction, RET instruction, etc. Therefore, a subroutine can be said to be a subordinate concept to a module.

Next, specific examples of the programs in control area 1, control area 2, and control area 3 will be described.
In the following examples of Figures 55 to 57,
Control area 1: Main control area usage area Control area 2: Game media number control area (usage area)
Control area 3: Outside the area used by the main control area.
55 is a diagram showing example 1 of programs in control area 1, control area 2, and control area 3. In example 1, the program in control area 1 uses register bank 0, and the programs in control area 2 and control area 3 use register bank 1. Therefore, when calling a program in control area 2 or control area 3 from the program in control area 1 and executing the program in control area 2 or control area 3, it is necessary to switch the register bank from register bank 0 to register bank 1.
Furthermore, when the program in control area 2 or control area 3 is terminated and the program in control area 1 is returned to, it is necessary to switch (return) the register bank from register bank 1 to register bank 0.

In addition, while a program other than the program in control area 1 (a program in control area 2 or a program in control area 3) is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited so that data in the RWM area of other areas is not updated due to interrupt processing.
Also, interrupts that cannot be disabled (NMI) are not used.

In FIG. 55, the program in control area 1 is as follows:
The initial "ORG 0000h" indicates that the top address of control area 1 is "0000h".
The next "M1_aaaaa" indicates the first program in control area 1.
In this program, the first "LD SP, @STACK1" indicates that stack 1 is to be set in the SP register (stack pointer register, here indicating the SP register of register bank 0). The initial value of stack 1 (@STACK1) is "F200h" as shown in FIG. 55, and this value is written to the SP register of register bank 0.

"CALLEX M2_nnnnn" is a command to call the program "M2_nnnnn." In this example, the program "M2_nnnnn" is stored in the control area 2.
When the "CALLEX mn" command is executed,
(1) Disable interrupts regardless of whether the interrupt is enabled or disabled at that time.
(2) Switch the register bank from register bank 0 to register bank 1,
(3) Call the specified address
To carry out the task.
In this way, when executing a program in the second control area or the third control area from a program in the first control area, the program in the second control area or the third control area can be executed by executing a CALLEX command.

Here, the CALLEX command is used instead of the general CALL command because the program "M1_aaaaa" in control area 1 calls (executes) the program "M2_nnnnn" in control area 2, and therefore it is necessary to switch register banks.
In other words, by using different register banks (different registers) when executing the program in control area 1 and when executing the program in control area 2, when returning to the program in control area 1 after the program in control area 2 has ended, the register values can be restored to those immediately before the program in control area 2 was called.

As described above, the CALLEX instruction does not include a DI (disable interrupt) instruction because interrupts are disabled before the target program is called.
In addition, another program is executed by the CALLEX instruction, and the RETEX instruction executed when the other program ends includes an instruction to permit an interrupt, so no EI (enable interrupt) instruction is provided when the other program ends.

Execution of "CALLEX M2_nnnnn" causes a jump to the starting address of "M2_nnnnn" in control area 2. Note that "ORG 2000h" at the beginning of the program in control area 2 indicates that the starting address of control area 2 is "2000h".
In the program "M2_nnnnn" in control area 2, the top address "LD SP, @STACK2" indicates that stack 2 is set in the SP register (here, this means the SP register of register bank 1 after the register bank is switched). The initial value of stack 2 (@STACK2) is "F300h" as shown in FIG. 55, and this value is written to the SP register of register bank 1.

The next "CALL M2_ooooo" is a command to call program "M2_ooooo". Program "M2_ooooo" is stored in control area 2 (the same area). Here, since the call is to program "M2_ooooo" in the same control area 2, there is no need to switch register banks. For this reason, the CALL command is used instead of the CALLEX command (unlike the CALLEX command, the register bank is not switched). In example 1 of Figure 55, when executing programs in control area 2 and control area 3, register bank 1 is used in both cases. And the switch from register bank 0 to register bank 1 has already been executed by "CALLEX M2_nnnnn" described above.

After the program "M2_ooooo" is terminated (RET command), the RETEX command is executed. This RETEX command corresponds to the "CALLEX M2_nnnnn" command executed in the program of the control area 1.
The RETEX command is
(1) The interrupt state is set to the state before the CALLEX instruction.
(2) Switch the register bank from register bank 1 to register bank 0,
(3) Return (RET) (return to the next instruction after "CALLEX M2_nnnnn" (the program at the return address))
To carry out the task.
On the other hand, the RET instruction, unlike the RETEX instruction, does not change the interrupt state and does not switch register banks.

This causes the program to return to the control area 1 again.
If the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the RETEX instruction puts the state into the interrupt enabled state. On the other hand, if the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the RETEX instruction puts the state into the interrupt disabled state.

In the above program flow, for example, the SP registers of register bank 0 and register bank 1 are as follows:
In the program "M1_aaaaa" in the control area 1, "LD SP, @STACK1"
SP=F200h (register bank 0)
It becomes.

Next, if a program is executed and, for example, two bytes of data are stored in stack area 1,
SP=F1FEh (register bank 0)
will be updated.
When "CALLEX M2_nnnnn" is executed with this SP register value, "LD SP, @STACK2" in the program "M2_nnnnn" in control area 2 executes the following:
SP=F300h (register bank 1)
It becomes.

Then, when the program "M2_ooooo" in the control area 2 is executed and, for example, 4 bytes of stack are filled in the stack area 2,
SP = F2FCh (register bank 1)
will be updated.
When the program "M2_oooooo" ends with this SP register value and the RETEX instruction is used to return to the program in control area 1, the register bank used in the program in control area 1 will be register bank 0, and the SP register value at that point will be "F1FEh".
Even when the program "M2_ooooo" in control area 2 ends and returns to the program in control area 1 by the RETEX instruction, the SP register value in register bank 1 remains "F2FCh."

Next, in the program "M1_aaaaa" in the control area 1, "CALLEX M3_xxxxx" is a command to call the program "M3_xxxxx." In this example, the program "M3_xxxxx" is stored in the control area 3.
Note that this "CALLEX M3_xxxxx" switches the register bank from register bank 0 to register bank 1 again.
Execution of "CALLEX M3_xxxxx" causes a jump to the starting address of "M3_xxxxx" in control area 3. Note that "ORG 2A00h" at the beginning of control area 3 indicates that the starting address of control area 3 is "2A00h".

In the program "M3_xxxxx" in control area 3, "LD SP, @STACK3" indicates that stack 3 is set in the SP register (meaning the SP register of register bank 1 in this case). The initial value of stack 3 (@STACK3) is "F400h" as shown in FIG. 55, and this value is written to the SP register of register bank 1. Therefore, as described above, the SP register value of register bank 1 immediately before "LD SP, @STACK3" is "F2FCh", but this value is overwritten to "F400h".
The following "CALL M3_yyyyy" is an instruction to call the program "M3_yyyyy." The program "M3_yyyyy" is stored in the control area 3. As in the above, this CALL instruction does not switch the register bank.

Then, after the program "M3_yyyyy" ends (RET command), the RETEX command returns the interrupt state to the state before the "CALLEX M3_xxxxx" command, switches the register bank from register bank 1 to register bank 0, and returns (RET). This causes the program to return to the next command after "CALLEX M3_xxxxx" (the program at the return address).

In this way, when jumping from a program in control area 1 to a program in control area 2 or control area 3, the register bank is switched by the CALLEX instruction. This protects the registers in register bank 0 that were used in the program in control area 1.
On the other hand, in Example 1, after the program "M2_nnnnn" in control area 2 is executed, the program "M3_xxxxx" in control area 3 is executed. Then, both the program in control area 2 and the program in control area 3 use register bank 1. For this reason, there is a risk that the register values used in the program in control area 2 may change due to the execution of the program in control area 3.

If there is no need to protect register values when moving between the programs in control area 2 and control area 3, no instructions to protect the register values are required. On the other hand, if you want to protect registers so that they do not change when a program in control area 3 is executed after a program in control area 2 is executed, or when a program in control area 2 is executed after a program in control area 3 is executed, instructions to protect the registers are added before or after the program "CALL M2_ooooo" in control area 2, or before or after the program "CALL M3_yyyyy" in control area 3.

in particular,
In the control area 2 program,
PUSH ALL
CALL M2_ooooo
POP ALL
or
In the program of the control area 3,
PUSH ALL
CALL M3_yyyyy
POP ALL
Let us assume that.
Here, similarly to the third embodiment, "PUSH ALL" is a command statement for saving all registers to the stack area, and "POP ALL" is a command statement for restoring all saved registers from the stack area.
Moreover, "PUSH AF" (described later) is a command statement for saving the AF register to a stack area, and "POP AF" is a command statement for restoring the saved AF register from the stack area.
Note that the stack area when saving to or restoring from a stack area refers to stack area 1 shown in FIG. 52 when "PUSH ALL", "POP ALL", "PUSH AF", or "POP AF" is issued as an instruction in control area 1, stack area 2 shown in FIG. 52 when "PUSH ALL", "POP ALL", "PUSH AF", or "POP AF" is issued as an instruction in control area 2, and stack area 3 shown in FIG. 52 when "PUSH ALL", "POP ALL", "PUSH AF", or "POP AF" is issued as an instruction in control area 3.

Figure 56 shows example 2 of programs in control area 1, control area 2, and control area 3. In example 2, the programs in control area 1 and control area 2 use register bank 0, and the program in control area 3 uses register bank 1. Therefore, when a program in control area 2 is called and executed from a program in control area 1, register bank 0 remains. In contrast, when a program in control area 3 is called and executed from a program in control area 1, the register bank is switched from register bank 0 to register bank 1. Then, when the program in control area 3 is terminated and the program in control area 1 is returned to, the register bank is switched (back) from register bank 1 to register bank 0.

In FIG. 56, the program in control area 1 is as follows:
The initial "ORG 0000h" is the same as in Example 1.
"M1_aaaaa" indicates the program at the first address of control area 1.
In this program, "LD SP, @STACK1" is an instruction to set stack 1 in the SP register, similar to Example 1.
After that, the program "M2_nnnnn" in control area 2 is executed, but since both the program in control area 1 and the program in control area 2 use register bank 0, the CALLEX instruction, which involves switching of register banks, is not used. In other words, the CALL instruction is used in this case. The CALL instruction does not switch register banks.

When a program in control area 2 is executed while a program in control area 1 is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited. The interrupt prohibition instruction is a DI instruction in the figure.
After executing the DI command, "PUSH AF" is executed to save the AF register (store it in the stack area). After that, "CALL M2_nnnnn" is executed to execute the program "M2_nnnnn" in the control area 2.
The reason for saving the AF register here is as follows. When jumping to the program "M2_nnnnn" in control area 2, an instruction "LD SP, @STACK2" that sets the stack pointer is executed, as described below. When this LD instruction is executed, the value of the second zero flag (see FIG. 43) in the flag (F) register changes, or there is a risk that it will change. Therefore, the AF register is saved before jumping to the program in control area 2.

The "ORG 2000h" at the beginning of control area 2 is the same as in example 1.
In "M2_nnnnn" in control area 2, "LD (BF_STACK), SP" is a command to save the stack pointer. This process corresponds to the process of storing the current SP register value in a specified memory area (BF_STACK) in RWM area 2 shown in FIG. 52. Since the same register bank 0 is used for the program in control area 1 and the program in control area 2, when jumping from the program in control area 1 to the program in control area 2, the stack pointer when the program in control area 1 was being executed is saved and the stack pointer for the program in control area 2 is set.

In other words, the CALL instruction does not switch register banks, and the program in control area 1 and the program in control area 2 use a register in the same register bank (for example, the SP register). Therefore, if the register is not saved using "LD (BF_STACK), SP", the register pointer used by the program in control area 1 will be overwritten by the execution of the program in control area 2, and when returning to the program in control area 1 after the program in control area 2 has finished, the correct stack pointer in the program in control area 1 will not be specified.

The next "LD SP, @STACK2" indicates that stack 2 (F300h) is to be set in the SP register, similar to example 1 above.
As described above, "PUSH ALL" is an instruction to save all registers.
The next "CALL M2_ooooo" is an instruction to call the program "M2_ooooo." The program "M2_ooooo" is stored in control area 2. Since a normal CALL instruction does not switch register banks, register bank 0 remains the same even during execution of the program "M2_ooooo."
When the program "M2_ooooo" is terminated, all the saved registers are restored by "POP ALL."

The next "LD SP, (BF_STACK)" is an instruction to restore the saved stack pointer. This process corresponds to the process of storing the data stored in a specific memory area (BF_STACK) in the RWM area 2 shown in FIG. 52 in the SP register (setting it as the SP register value). As a result, the stack pointer returns to the value it had before the "LD (BF_STACK), SP" instruction, in other words, the value it had when the program in the control area 1 was being executed.
Thereafter, the RET command causes the program to return to the program in the control area 1.
When returning to the program in control area 1, the saved AF register is restored by "POP AF", which returns the AF register to the value it had before the program "M2_nnnnn" was executed.
Next, the EI instruction is used to resume the interrupts that were previously disabled.

The above setting, saving, and restoring of the stack pointer will now be described with a concrete example.
First, in the program "M1_aaaaa" in the control area 1, "LD SP, @STACK1" executes
SP=F200h (register bank 0)
It becomes.
Next, when some program is executed and 1 byte of data is loaded to "F200h",
SP=F1FFh (register bank 0)
will be updated.
With this SP register value, "CALL M2_nnnnn" is executed, and when the program "M2_nnnnn" in the control area 2 is executed, the stack pointer "F1FFh" in the program in the control area 1 is saved by "LD (BF_STACK), SP." In this case, "F1FFh" is stored in a specified storage area in the RWM area 2.

Next, by "LD SP, @STACK2",
SP=F300h (register bank 0)
It becomes.
Therefore, the SP is updated from the previous "F1FFh" to "F300h".
Then, when the program "M2_ooooo" is executed and, for example, 2 bytes are added to the stack,
SP=F2FEh (register bank 0)
will be updated.

Next, when the program "M2_ooooo" is terminated and "LD SP, (BF_STACK)" is executed, "F1FFh" stored in the above-mentioned predetermined storage area is read and stored (overwritten) in SP. In other words, SP is updated from the previous "F2FEh" to "F1FFh".
Therefore,
SP=F1FFh (register bank 0)
It becomes.

Next, in the program of control area 1, execution of "CALLEX M3_xxxxx" causes a jump to "M3_xxxxx" in control area 3. This CALLEX instruction also disables interrupts and switches the register bank from register bank 0 to register bank 1.
The "ORG 2A00h" at the beginning of control area 3 is the same as in example 1.
In "M3_xxxx" of control area 3, "LD SP, @STACK3" sets stack 3 (F400h) in the SP register (SP register of register bank 1).
The following "CALL M3_yyyyy" is an instruction to call the program "M3_yyyyy." The program "M3_yyyyy" is stored in the control area 3. As in the above, this CALL instruction does not switch the register bank.

Then, after the program "M3_yyyyy" ends (RET command), the RETEX command returns the interrupt state to the state before the "CALLEX M3_xxxxx" command, switches the register bank from register bank 1 to register bank 0, and returns (RET). This causes the program to return to the next command after "CALLEX M3_xxxxx" (the program at the return address).

Figure 57 shows example 3 of programs in control area 1, control area 2, and control area 3. In example 3, the programs in control area 1 and control area 3 use register bank 0, and the program in control area 2 uses register bank 1. Therefore, when a program in control area 3 is called from a program in control area 1 and executed, register bank 0 remains. In contrast, when a program in control area 2 is called from a program in control area 1 and executed, the register bank is switched from register bank 0 to register bank 1. Then, when the program in control area 2 is terminated and the program in control area 1 is returned to, the register bank is switched (back) from register bank 1 to register bank 0.

In FIG. 56, the program in control area 1 is as follows:
The initial "ORG 0000h" is the same as in Example 1.
In the next "M1_aaaaa", "LD SP, @STACK1" is a command to set stack 1 (F200h) in the SP register, similar to example 1.
The next "CALLEX M2_nnnnn" is an instruction to call the program "M2_nnnnn" in the control area 2. This CALLEX instruction disables interrupts and switches the register bank from register bank 0 to register bank 1.
Execution of "CALLEX M2_nnnnn" jumps to program "M2_nnnnn" in control area 2. Note that "ORG 2000h" at the beginning of control area 2 is the same as in example 1.
In "M2_nnnnn" of control area 2, "LD SP, @STACK2" is a command to set stack 2 (F300h) in the SP register (the SP register of register bank 1), similar to example 1.

The next "CALL M2_ooooo" is an instruction to call the program "M2_ooooo." The program "M2_ooooo" is stored in the control area 2. The CALL instruction does not switch register banks.
After the program "M2_oooooo" is ended (RET instruction), the RETEX instruction is executed. The RETEX instruction returns the interrupt state to the state before the CALLEX instruction, switches the register bank from register bank 1 to register bank 0, and returns (RET). This causes a return to the next instruction (the program at the return address) of "CALLEX M2_nnnnn" in control area 1. Then, the program in the first control area is made executable again.

In control area 1, after the program "M2_nnnnn" is executed, the program "M3_xxxxx" in control area 3 is executed.
Since both the program in control area 1 and the program in control area 3 use register bank 0, the CALLEX instruction which involves switching of register banks is not used.
When a program in control area 3 is executed while a program in control area 1 is being executed, first, interrupt processing is inhibited by a DI command.
After the DI command is executed, the AF register is saved (stored in the stack area) by the "PUSH AF" command. Then, the program "M3_xxxxx" in the control area 3 is executed by "CALL M3_xxxxx".

The "ORG 2A00h" at the beginning of control area 3 is the same as in example 1.
In "M3_xxxx" in control area 3, "LD (BF_STACK), SP" is a command to save the stack pointer. This process corresponds to the process of storing the current SP register value in a specified memory area (BF_STACK) in RWM area 3 shown in FIG. 52. Since the same register bank 0 is used for the program in control area 1 and the program in control area 3, when jumping from the program in control area 1 to the program in control area 3, the stack pointer when the program in control area 1 was being executed is saved and the stack pointer for the program in control area 3 is set.

"LD SP, @STACK3" indicates that stack 3 (F400h) is to be set in the SP register, similar to example 1 above.
Next, all registers are saved by "PUSH ALL."
The next "CALL M3_yyyyy" is an instruction to call the program "M3_yyyyy." The program "M3_yyyyy" is stored in the control area 3. Since the CALL instruction does not switch register banks, the register bank remains 0 even during the execution of the program "M3_yyyyy."
When the program "M3_yyyyy" is terminated, all the saved registers are restored by "POP ALL."

The next "LD SP, (BF_STACK)" is an instruction to restore the saved stack pointer. This process corresponds to the process of storing the data stored in a specific memory area (BF_STACK) in the RWM area 3 shown in FIG. 52 in the SP register (setting it as the SP register value). As a result, the stack pointer returns to the value it had before the "LD (BF_STACK), SP" instruction, in other words, the value it had when the program in the control area 1 was being executed.
Thereafter, the RET command causes the program to return to the program in the control area 1.
When returning to the program in control area 1, the saved AF register is restored by "POP AF", which returns the AF register to the value it had before program "M2_nnnnn" was executed.
Then, the EI instruction is used to resume the interrupts that were previously disabled.

Next, we will explain the code size of the program.
In the fourth embodiment, the code searches for each instruction are as follows:
CALLEX mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh): 2 bytes CALLEX mn (mn ≠ 2000h to 20FFh): 4 bytes RETEX: 2 bytes CALL mn: 3 bytes RET: 1 byte DI: 1 byte EI: 1 byte PUSH AF: 1 byte POP AF: 1 byte

The code size of the CALLEX instruction is the same as in the third embodiment, but will be explained again.
In the CALLEX instruction, the code size of "CALEX mn" when calling an address range of "2000h" to "20FFh" is 2 bytes, and the code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling an address range other than "2000h" to "20FFh" is 4 bytes.

The range of addresses from "2000h" to "20FFh" is "FFh", i.e., 1 byte. In this case, the code value of the address value "2000h" is set to "0h". This allows the code value when calling up the address value "20FFh" to be "FFh", so the code size of "mn" can be set to 1 byte regardless of when calling up any address in the range from "2000h" to "20FFh".
Furthermore, when encoding the opcode of "CALLEX," the code is set to 1 byte, which allows the code size of "CALLEX mn" (mn=2000h to 20FFh) to be set to 2 bytes.

On the other hand, when "mn" is "2100h" or greater, the code size of "mn" becomes 2 bytes. Furthermore, if "mn" is not in the range of "2000h" to "20FFh", the "CALLEX" code is composed of 2 bytes. If the opcode were composed of 1 byte, this would be limited to 256 out of several thousand instructions, so a 1-byte code is assigned as the "CALLEX" code when "mn" is in the range of "2000h" to "20FFh", but a 2-byte code is assigned as the "CALLEX" code when "mn" is not in the range of "2000h" to "20FFh".

As described above, in the case of the "CALLEX mn" instruction, if "mn" is in the range of "2000h" to "20FFh", the instruction will have a code size of 2 bytes, and if "mn" is outside the above range, the instruction will have a code size of 4 bytes.
Therefore, if instructions that are called more frequently are concentrated in the address range of "2000h" to "20FFh" in the control area 2, more of the instructions will have a code size of just 2 bytes. This makes it possible to save on the storage capacity of the control area 1.
Furthermore, by storing as many addresses as possible when a program in control area 2 is called from a program in control area 1 in the address range of "2000h" to "20FFh" within the address range of "2000h" to "25FFh" in the second control area, it is possible to easily determine when checking control area 2 that it is a program called from a program in control area 1.

A specific explanation will be given by taking FIG. 55 (Example 1) as an example.
55, the starting address of control area 2 is "2000h." The starting address of control area 3 is "2A00h." Therefore, for example, if the program "M2_nnnnn" of control area 2 is located within the address range of "2000h" to "20FFh," the program "CALLEX M2_nnnnn" of control area 1 can be composed of 2 bytes.
Moreover, in the program "M2_nnnnn" in the control area 2, after "LD SP, @STACK2", "CALL M2_ooooo" is executed to call the program "M2_ooooo" in the control area 2. Note that the program "M2_ooooo" does not need to be within the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh".

Here, in the program of the control area 1, it is also conceivable to directly use "CALLEX M2_ooooo" rather than "CALLEX M2_nnnnn".
However, if the program "M2_oooooo" to be actually executed in the program of control area 2 is placed after address "2100h" and many top programs of programs called by the CALLEX instruction in control area 1 are placed in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", it becomes possible to provide many 2-byte CALLEX instructions in the program of control area 1. This makes it possible to save the program capacity of control area 1. In other words, the program of control area 2 is called from the program of control area 1 not only once, but may be configured to be called multiple times.

The start address of the program in control area 3 is "2A00h", which is after "20FFh". Therefore, the program "M3_xxxxx" in control area 3 is located after address "20FFh". For this reason, the program "CALLEX M3_xxxxx" in control area 1 is 4 bytes. In other words, since there is no range of addresses from "2000h" to "20FFh" in control area 3, the code size of the CALLEX instruction when calling a program in control area 3 from a program in control area 1 is always 4 bytes. Note that calling a program in control area 3 from a program in control area 1 is not limited to once, but may be configured to be called multiple times.

Here, when calling the program "M3_xxxxx" with a normal CALL command,
DI (1 byte)
PUSH AF (1 byte)
CALL M3_xxxxxx (3 bytes)
POP AF (1 byte)
EI (1 byte)
This totals 7 bytes, which is larger than the 4-byte CALLEX command. Therefore, even when calling a program in control area 3 from a program in control area 1, using the CALLEX command instead of the CALL command can reduce the size.

Although the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In order to provide more 2-byte "CALLEX mn (mn=2000h to 20FFh)" in the program of the control area 1, the JR (jump) instruction shown in FIG. 50 of the third embodiment may be used.
58 is a diagram showing an example of a program in this case. The code size of the JR instruction is assumed to be 3 bytes, similar to the third embodiment.

Then, a JR instruction is placed at the address in control area 2 specified by the CALLEX instruction in control area 1. For example, if "CALLEX 2000h" is specified in the program in control area 1, then "JR 2100h" is placed at address "2000h" in control area 2. In other words, the jump destination address is set to "2100h" or later.
Since the "JR mn" command requires three bytes, "JR mn" is allocated in 3-byte increments from address "2000h" onwards in the control area 2.
The actual program can then be placed in the control area 2 starting from address 2100h.
By setting in this way, it is possible to provide as many 2-byte CALLEX instructions as possible in the program in the control area 1.

(2) In Example 1 of Figure 55 to Example 3 of Figure 57, control area 1 calls the program "M2_nnnnn" in control area 2, and after terminating this "M2_nnnnn", it calls the program "M3_xxxxx" in control area 3 and executes this "M3_xxxxx". However, the process order and processing timing for executing the programs in control area 2 and control area 3 can be redesigned as appropriate.
For example, after executing a program in control area 2, a program in control area 1 may be executed, and then a program in control area 3 may be executed at a certain processing timing; or, after executing a program in control area 3, a program in control area 1 may be executed, and then a program in control area 2 may be executed at a certain processing timing.
As described above, the number of times that the program in control area 1 calls the program in control area 2 is not limited to one time, but may be multiple times. Similarly, the number of times that the program in control area 1 calls the program in control area 3 is not limited to one time, but may be multiple times.

(3) The fourth embodiment can be applied not only to medal-less gaming machines, but also to slot machines and pachinko machines under the Entertainment and Amusement Act. Furthermore, it can be applied to Parrot and casino machines that use game balls.
(4) The first to fourth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to fourth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Additional Notes>
The inventions (original inventions) described in the original specification etc. of the present application can be, for example, the following Original Inventions 1 and 2. The problems that the original inventions aim to solve, the means for solving the problems related to the original inventions, and the effects of the original inventions are as follows. However, this does not mean that the inventions described in this specification are limited to Original Inventions 1 and 2.

1. Initial invention 1
The original invention was
A main control ROM area (a storage area of the main control ROM 502);
A game media number control ROM area (a storage area of the game media number control ROM 504),
A ROM area outside the area of use (a storage area of the ROM 506 outside the area of use),
The program in the game media number control ROM area is configured so that the program in the ROM area outside the use area cannot be called.
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that a program in the main control ROM area can call a program in the external ROM area.

2. Initial invention 2
The original invention was
A main control ROM area (a storage area of the main control ROM 502);
A game media number control ROM area (a storage area of the game media number control ROM 504),
A ROM area outside the area of use (a storage area of the ROM 506 outside the area of use),
The first register bank (register bank 0) has a plurality of registers (e.g., an F register, an SP register, etc.),
The second register bank (register bank 1) has a plurality of registers (e.g., an F register, an SP register, etc.),
When a program in the main control ROM area calls a program in the number of game media control ROM area, a special call command (CALLEX command) is used.
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to switch from the first register bank to the second register bank by executing a special call instruction.

10 Slot machine, gaming machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 21 Performance lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 46 Cancel switch, settlement switch 47 Counting switch 50 Main control board (main control means), main control board (main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 (First main control) RWM
53a bet number storage means 53b award number storage means 54 (first main control) ROM
55 Main CPU, (first main control) CPU
61: Role selection means 62: Winning flag control means 65: Reel control means 66: Winning determination means 67: Awarding means 73: Setting value display means 76: Credit number display LED
77 Bet number display unit 78 Acquired number display LED, awarded number display unit 80 Sub-control board (sub-control means), sub-control board (sub-control means)
80a 1-chip microprocessor 81 Input port 82 Output port 83 (Secondary control) RWM
84 (Sub-control) ROM
85 Sub-CPU, (Sub-control) CPU
91: Performance output control means 100: Payout control board (credit number management board), game media number control board 101: Input port 102: Output port 103: (Second main control) RWM
103a Game media number storage means 104 (second main control) ROM
105 Credit number management CPU, (second main control) CPU
106 Capacitor 107 Capacitor A
108 Capacitor B
111 Credit number management means 112 Total number of game media clear switch 113 Role ratio monitor 120 Game media number display board (game media number display device)
121 Game media number display unit 130 Connection terminal board 150 Power supply board 151 Capacitor 161 Harness A
162 Harness B
163 Harness C
164 Harness D
165 Harness E
166 Harness F
167 Harness G
168 Harness H
190 External centralized terminal board 200 Management device (CR unit), lending unit 201 Bill insertion slot 202 Lending switch 203 Return switch 204 Points display unit 205 Card reader/writer 300 Hall computer 400 Management computer 500 One-chip microprocessor 501 Main CPU
502 Main control ROM
503 Main control RWM
504 Game media number control ROM
505 Game media number control RWM
506 ROM outside the usage area
507 RWM outside usage area

Claims (1)

The memory area of the microprocessor includes:
A main control ROM area;
A game media number control ROM area;
and a ROM area outside the use area,
a first register bank for use with a program in the main control ROM area;
A second register bank is provided for use in a program in the game media number control ROM area;
The first register bank has a plurality of registers,
the second register bank has a plurality of registers;
By executing a special call command stored in the main control ROM area , it is possible to call a program in the number of game media control ROM area from a program in the main control ROM area;
A gaming machine capable of switching from a first register bank to a second register bank by executing a special call command stored in a main control ROM area .

Images